Yamaha RX-V1000 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V1000

Categorie: Synthesizer

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

RX-8

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia ID

V641380

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

RX-V1000

Natural Sound AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

U C A

RX-V1000

0100V1000(UCA)-cv1/4 8/29/0, 4:31 PM1

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,

within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert

you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may

be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of

electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of

important operating and maintenance (servicing)

instructions in the literature accompanying the

appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating

instructions should be read before the unit is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating

instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions

should be followed.

5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near

water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen

sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming

pool, etc.

6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart

or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.

6A A unit and cart combination should be

moved with care. Quick stops, excessive

force, and uneven surfaces may cause the

unit and cart combination to overturn.

7 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to

a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

8 Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location

or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For

example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug,

or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings;

or placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or

cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the

ventilation openings.

9 Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources

such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce

heat.

10 Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power

supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or

as marked on the unit.

11 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or

pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying

particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit.

12 Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as

recommended by the manufacturer.

13 Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be

unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long

period of time.

14 Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that

objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the

inside of the unit.

15 Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by

qualified service personnel when:

A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged;

B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the

unit; or

C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or

D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or

exhibits a marked change in performance; or

E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged.

16 Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit

beyond those means described in the operating instructions.

All other servicing should be referred to qualified service

personnel.

17 Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away

from power lines.

18 Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so

that the grounding or polarization is not defeated.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT

TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

I CAUTION

0101V1000_Cau_EN 8/29/0, 1:32 PM2

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

III

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC,

to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high

quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this

product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void

your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to

comply with the requirements listed in FCC

Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices.

Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this

product in a residential environment will not result in

harmful interference with other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions

found in the users manual, may cause interference

harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment

by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through

loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most

importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.

19 For US customers only:

Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is

connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is

grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage

surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the

National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides

information with regard to proper grounding of the mast

and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to

an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC

– NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only)

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume

levels.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

CAUTION II

0101V1000_Cau_EN 8/29/0, 1:32 PM3

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place with at least 5 cm of ventilation space on the

top, right and left, and at the back of this unit

— away from direct sunlight, heat sources,

vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical

shock, do not place this unit where it may get

exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this

unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room

with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside

this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Buring objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause

electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this

unit.

6 Do not cover the rear panel of this unit with a

newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to

obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside

this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified

is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this

unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be

held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the

power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical

storm.

14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/

or liquid drops inside this unit.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods

of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug

from the wall outlet.

17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding that

this unit is faulty.

18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the

AC power plug from the wall outlet.

19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and general models

only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local main voltage

BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,

even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called

the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to

consume a very small quantity of power.

FREQUENCY STEP switch

(China and general models only)

Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in

different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch

(locating at the rear) according to the frequency

spacing in your area.

North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz

Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz

Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power

plug of this unit from the AC outlet.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the

space below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

III CAUTION

0101V1000_Cau_EN 8/29/0, 1:32 PM4

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

ADVANCED

OPERATION

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS........................................................... 1

FEATURES............................................................ 2

GETTING STARTED........................................... 3

Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ........................ 4

Front Panel ............................................................... 4

Remote Control ........................................................ 6

Using the Remote Control........................................ 8

Front Panel Display .................................................. 9

Rear Panel .............................................................. 10

PREPARATION

SPEAKER SETUP .............................................. 11

Speakers to Be Used............................................... 11

Speaker Placement ................................................. 11

CONNECTIONS ................................................. 12

Before Connecting Components ............................ 12

Connecting Audio Components ............................. 12

Connecting Video Components .............................. 14

Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 16

Connecting to an External Amplifier ..................... 18

Connecting an External Decoder ........................... 18

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ....................... 19

Connecting the Power Supply Cords ..................... 19

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ......................... 20

OSD Modes ............................................................ 20

Selecting the OSD Mode........................................ 20

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ......................... 21

Summary of SPEAKER SET Items

1A through 1F .................................................... 21

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER

OUTPUT LEVELS ......................................... 22

Before You Begin ................................................... 22

Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 23

BASIC OPERATION

BASIC PLAYBACK ........................................... 24

Input Modes and Indications .................................. 26

Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 28

Normal Stereo Reproduction.................................. 29

TUNING............................................................... 30

Connecting the Antennas........................................ 30

Automatic (or Manual) Tuning .............................. 31

Presetting Stations .................................................. 32

Tuning in to a Preset Station .................................. 33

Exchanging Preset Stations .................................... 34

BASIC RECORDING......................................... 35

ADVANCED OPERATION

SET MENU .......................................................... 36

Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU................. 36

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings)........... 37

2 LOW FRQ TEST ............................................... 40

3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and

right main speakers) ........................................... 41

4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 41

5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer)......... 41

6 INPUT RENAME .............................................. 41

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 41

8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 42

9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) ............. 42

10 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) ................ 42

11 DTS LFE LEVEL ............................................. 43

12 6.1/ES AUTO.................................................... 43

13 SP DELAY TIME ............................................. 43

14 DISPLAY SET.................................................. 44

15 MEMORY GUARD ......................................... 44

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT

SPEAKERS...................................................... 45

SLEEP TIMER.................................................... 46

Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 46

Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 46

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .................. 47

Control Area ........................................................... 47

Each Component Control Area .............................. 49

Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 54

Programming a New Remote Control Function

(Learn Feature)................................................... 55

Using the Macro Feature ........................................ 57

Changing the Source Name in

the Display Window........................................... 59

Clearing a Learned Function or Macro .................. 59

Clearing Learned Functions, Macros,

Renamed Source Names, and

Setup Manufacturer Codes................................. 60

ZONE 2 ................................................................ 61

Zone 2 Connections................................................ 61

Remote Control in Zone 2 ...................................... 62

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................. 63

Hi-Fi DSP Programs............................................... 63

CINEMA DSP Programs ........................................ 64

MOVIE THEATER Programs................................ 67

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER

EDITING ......................................................... 68

What is a sound field? ............................................ 68

Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 68

Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 69

Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value...... 69

Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions .......... 70

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................... 74

SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 79

0102V1000_1-10_EN 8/29/0, 1:32 PM1

Thank you for selecting this YAMAHA AV receiver.

Built-in 5-Channel Power Amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS Output Power

(0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz)

Main: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω)

Center: 100 W (8 Ω)

Rear: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω)

◆ Maximum Power (EIAJ)

(10% THD, 1 kHz)

[China and general models]

Main: 140 W + 140 W (8 Ω)

Center: 140 W (8 Ω)

Rear: 140 W + 140 W (8 Ω)

Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field

Processing

◆ Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP)

◆ Dolby Pro Logic decoder

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1

Decoder

◆ DTS/DTS ES Decoder

◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA

DSP Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby

Digital or DTS

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP

Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner

◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning

◆ Automatic Preset Tuning

◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset

Editing)

Other Features

◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter

◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with

15 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your

Audio/Video System

◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance

Adjustment

◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other

Future Formats

◆ BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing

Bass Response

◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in

Controlling This Unit

◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability

◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability

◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal

Jacks

◆ Sleep Timer

◆ Multi-Function Remote Control

◆ Custom Installation Facility

FEATURES

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,

“AC-3”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and

pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround” and “DTS ES” are

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control for such operations, the button name on the remote control is given in

parentheses in this manual.

0102V1000_1-10_EN 8/29/0, 1:32 PM2

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

ADVANCED

OPERATION

GETTING STARTED

Checking the Package Contents

Check your package to make sure it has the following items.

Remote control

Manganese batteries (3)

(AA, R6, UM-3)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, China

and general models)

AM loop antenna

Quick Reference Card

Installing Batteries in the Remote

Control

Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the

+ and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings

(+ and –) inside the battery compartment.

RESET button

■ Notes on batteries

• Change the batteries periodically.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline

and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging

carefully as these different types of batteries may have

the same shape and color.

■ Changing batteries

As the batteries lose power, the operating range of the

remote control decreases and the TRANSMIT indicator

does not flash or its light becomes dim. When you notice

any of these conditions, change all of the batteries.

After you have inserted new batteries, be sure to push

RESET in the battery compartment by using a ballpoint

pen or similar object before using the remote control.

(This does not clear the contents of the memory.)

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Note

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately.

Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into

contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment

thoroughly before installing new batteries.

(Australia and

Singapore models)

0102V1000_1-10_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front Panel

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When

you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will

be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce

sound.

Standby mode

In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power to receive infrared-signals from the remote

control.

2 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

3 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit (see page 9).

4 INPUT MODE

Selects the mode of input for sources that send two or

more types of signals to this unit (see page 26).

You cannot control the input mode when you select 6CH

INPUT as the input source.

5 INPUT l / h

Selects the input source (DVD, D-TV/LD, CBL/SAT,

VCR 1, VCR 2/DVR, V-AUX, PHONO, CD, TUNER,

CD-R, MD/TAPE) you want to listen to or watch.

6 VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

7 6CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.

The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes

priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or

the input selector buttons).

8 SPEAKERS A/B

Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A

and/or B terminals on the rear panel.

9 BASS EXTENSION ON/OFF

When pushed in (ON), this feature boosts the bass

frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB

(60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This

boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer.

However, this boost may not be noticeable if “1B MAIN

SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/

BASS OUT” is set to SWFR.

0 PROCESSOR DIRECT ON/OFF

When pushed in (ON), BASS, TREBLE, and BASS

EXTENSION are bypassed, eliminating any alteration of

the original signal.

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

123 4567

89 0

rt yu

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

FM/AM

iopa

0102V1000_1-10_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM4

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

q REC OUT/ZONE 2

Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video

recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independent of the source

you are listening to in the main room. When set to the

SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source is directed

to all outputs.

w EFFECT

Switches the effect speakers (center, rear and rear center

(see page 17)) on and off. If you turn off the output of

these speakers by using EFFECT, all Dolby Digital and

DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are

directed to the left and right main channels.

When Dolby Digital or DTS signals are mixed, the left

and right main channel signal levels may not match.

e A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E).

r PROGRAM l / h

Selects the DSP program (see page 28).

t PRESET/TUNING l / h

Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:)

appears next to the band indication on the front panel

display, and selects the tuning frequency when the colon

(:) does not appear.

y PHONES jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.

u VIDEO AUX jacks

Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external

source such as a game console. To reproduce source

signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input

source. To direct this source to the VCR 1 output jacks,

select V-AUX by using REC OUT/ZONE 2.

i PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h (the

colon (:) turns on or off) between selecting a preset

station number and tuning.

This button is also used to exchange the assignment of

two preset stations with each other.

o FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

p MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for

more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.

a TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual.

To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so

that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel

display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this

button so that the “AUTO” indicator does not light up.

s BASS

Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right

main channels.

Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to

decrease the low-frequency response.

d TREBLE

Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right

main channels.

Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to

decrease the high-frequency response.

Note

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the

center, rear and rear center speakers may not match that of the

left and right main speakers.

■ Opening and closing the front

panel door

When you are not operating the controls behind the front

panel door, close the door.

To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.

DIGITAL

0102V1000_1-10_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM5

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Remote Control

This section describes the basic operation of this unit with the remote control. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES”

on pages 47 to 60 for full details.

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

A Programming section

Provides a selection of programming types you can utilize to

conveniently operates your other components.

B A and B buttons

See page 47.

C Operation section

Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc. for operating

your other components.

D Others

Functions vary depending on your components that are set up

with the manufacturer code.

E Setup section

Sets speaker output levels, SET MENU, DSP parameters, etc.

0102V1000_1-10_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM6

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

3 STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

4 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

5 Input selector buttons

Select the input source.

6 Display window

Shows the selected source component that you are

controlling.

7 SOURCE SELECT k/n

Selects the source component without switching the

input.

8 10KEY/DSP

Selects the numeric button (10KEY) mode or DSP mode.

9 DSP program group/Numeric buttons

Select DSP programs or numbers according to the

position of 10KEY/DSP. (Press a button repeatedly to

select a DSP program within that group.)

0 6.1/ES

Turns on or off the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES

decoder with 10KEY/DSP set to the DSP position.

q A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups.

w PRESET +/–

Selects a preset station number (1 to 8).

e RE-NAME

Used for changing the input source name in the display

window (see page 59).

r CLEAR

Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn

and rename features, programmed macros, and set

manufacturer codes (see pages 59 and 60).

t LEARN

Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for

programming the functions of other remote controls (see

pages 54 to 56).

y MACRO

Used to program a series of operations for control by a

single button (see page 58).

u MACRO ON/OFF

Turns the macro function on and off.

i 6CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks.

o MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output

to the previous volume level.

p VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

a EFFECT

Switches the effect speakers (center, rear and rear center

(see page 17)) on and off. If the output of these speakers

is turned off, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals

except for the LFE channel are directed to the left and

right main channels.

s Cover

Slides down to show the setup buttons.

d LEVEL

Selects the effect speaker channels (center, rear, rear

center (see page 17) and subwoofer) so you can adjust

their output level independently.

f ON SCREEN

Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video

monitor.

g SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

h TEST

Outputs the test tone.

j PARAMETER/SET MENU

Selects the PARAMETER mode or SET MENU mode.

k Cursor buttons k/n/–/+

Select and adjust DSP program parameters and SET

MENU items according to the position of PARAMETER/

SET MENU.

l RESET

Press this button after you have changed the batteries or

when the remote control stops working properly.

(Pressing RESET does not clear the acquired functions.)

0102V1000_1-10_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM7

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Using the Remote Control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,

stove or bath;

– dusty places; or

– in places subject to extremely low temperatures.

STANDBY

/ON

–

30° 30°

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SURROUND

DIGITAL

Approximately 6 m (20 feet)

0102V1000_1-10_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM8

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front Panel Display

1 t indicator

Lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is on.

2 VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP (see

page 29).

3 g and o indicators

Light up according to the type of Dolby signals this unit

is reproducing. “ g ” lights up when the built-

in Dolby Digital decoder is on. “ o ” lights up

when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on.

4 x indicator

Lights up when you select a DSP program.

5 DSP program indicators

The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the

ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE

THEATER 2 or q/DTS SURROUND DSP program is

selected.

6 STEREO indicator

Lights up when the unit is receiving a strong signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.

7 AUTO indicator

Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

8 VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

9 Input source indicator

Shows the current input source with the arrow-shaped

cursor.

0 c indicator

Lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or

DTS ES decoder is on.

q v indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

w SP A/B indicator

Lights up according to which set of main speakers is

selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of

speakers are selected.

e Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

r Multi-information display

Shows the current DSP program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

t MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show a station can be stored.

y TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit tunes in to a station.

u ZONE 2 indicator

Lights up when you select the input source while the

remote control is in the Zone 2 mode (see pages 61

and 62).

i SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

STEREO

AUTO

0q w

0102V1000_1-10_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM9

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Rear Panel

1 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

2 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

3 Antenna input terminals

See page 30 for connection information.

4 Audio component jacks

See pages 12 and 13 for connection information.

5 Video component jacks

See pages 14 and 15 for connection information.

6 Speaker terminals

See pages 16 and 17 for connection information.

7 PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks

See page 18 for connection information.

8 AC power cord

Connect to a power outlet.

9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and general

models only)

See page 19.

0 q RF (AC-3) input jack (China and general

models only)

See page 14.

q REMOTE CONTROL IN/OUT jacks

See page 61 for details.

w RS-232C connector

This is a control expansion connector for commercial use.

Consult your dealer for details.

e 6CH INPUT jacks

See pages 13 and 18 for connection information.

r ZONE 2 OUT jacks

See page 61 for details.

t FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and

general models only)

See page 30.

y IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your

speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode

before you change the setting of this switch (see page 19).

u AC OUTLET(S)

Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V

components (see page 19).

DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

SPEAKERS PRE OUT/MAIN IN

MAIN

CENTER

REAR

(SURROUND)

TUNER

DIGITAL INPUT

REMOTE CONTROL

6CH INPUT

MD/

TAPE

CD-R

DVD

ANT

GND

RS-

232C

D-TV

/LD

UNBAL.

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL:

SELECT BY SETMENU

(PLAY)

DVD

S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT

DVD

S VIDEO VIDEO

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

OUT

ZONE 2 OUT

MONITOR

OUT

100 kHz/10 kHz

50 kHz/ 9 kHz

MD/TAPE

CBL

/SAT

(AC-3)

OUT

(REC)

PHONO

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

FREQUENCY

STEP

FM AM

SURROUND

(PLAY)

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

L R L

MAIN

OUT

REAR

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

R L

+ –

R L

D-TV/LD

MONITOR

OUT

+ –

– +

+ – – +

REAR

(SURROUND)

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

23 4 5 6 7 8

(General

model)

0102V1000_1-10_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM10

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER SETUP

Speakers to Be Used

This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-

field quality with a 5-speaker system, using left and right

main speakers, left and right rear speakers and a center

speaker. The 6-speaker system, which adds a rear center

speaker to the 5 speaker configuration, is the latest

advancement in surround sound technology. (See page 17

for using the rear center speaker.) If you use different

brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your

system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types

of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you

use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers

with the same tonal quality.

The main speakers are used for the main source sound

plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers

from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are

used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center

speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If

for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker,

you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained

with the full system.

The main speakers should be high-performance models

and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system. The other

speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers.

For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use

high-performance models that can reproduce sounds over

the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers.

■ Use of a subwoofer expands your

sound field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from

any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when

the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back.

The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.

Speaker Placement

Refer to the following diagram when you place the

speakers.

Main

speaker (L)

Center speaker

Main speaker (R)

Subwoofer

Rear speaker (R)

Rear center

speaker

See page 17.

Rear speaker (L)

■ Main speakers

Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance

from the ideal listening position. The distance of each

speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the

same.

■ Rear speakers

Place these speakers behind your listening position,

facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet)

above the floor.

■ Center speaker

Align the front face of the center speaker with the front

face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to

the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the

monitor and centrally between the main speakers.

Note

• If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will

be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case,

“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE (see

page 38 for details).

■ Subwoofer

The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because

low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better

to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it

slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall

reflections.

CAUTION

Some types of speakers interfere with a video monitor.

If this problem occurs, move the speakers away from

the monitor. If you cannot avoid installing the center

speaker or subwoofer near the video monitor, use a

magnetically shielded speaker.

PREPARATION

1.8 m

0103V1000_11-18_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM11

CONNECTIONS

Before Connecting Components

CAUTION

Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been

completed.

• Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some

components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions

for each component to be connected to this unit.

• When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or

changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling

system to all its products.

• After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct.

Connecting Audio Components

■ Connecting to digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of

digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital

and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to

both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given

to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital

input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital

signals (see page 25 for details).

• You can designate the input for each digital jack according to

your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET

MENU (see page 41 for details).

About the dust protection cap

Pull out the cap from the optical jack

before you connect the fiber optic cable.

Do not discard the cap. When you are not

using the optical jack, be sure to put the

cap back in place. This cap protects the

jack from dust.

Note

• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.

If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this

standard, this unit may not function properly.

■ Connecting a turntable

PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM

or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with

a low-output MC cartridge, use an inline boosting

transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to

these jacks.

• The GND terminal does not electrically ground the turntable. It

simply reduces noise in the signal. In some cases, you may

hear less noise if you do not connect to the GND terminal.

■ Connecting a CD player

• The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a

CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks.

• When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and

OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from

the COAXIAL CD jack.

■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape

deck or CD recorder

• Only digital signals input from a source such as a CD or DVD

are output from the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

• When you connect your recording component to both the

analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given

to the digital signal.

• You can connect an MD recorder to any digital input jack by

using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see

page 41).

Notes

• When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its

power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit

may distort the sound from other components.

• When you record from a source component connected to this

unit while this unit is set in the standby mode, the recorded

sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem, turn on this

unit.

0103V1000_11-18_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM12

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

TUNER

DIGITAL INPUT

REMOTE CONTROL

6CH INPUT

MD/

TAPE

CD-R

DVD

ANT

GND

RS-

232C

D-TV

/LD

UNBAL.

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL:

SELECT BY SETMENU

(PLAY)

DVD

S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT

DVD

S VIDEO VIDEO

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

OUT

ZONE 2 OUT

MONITOR

OUT

100 kHz/10 kHz

50 kHz/ 9 kHz

MD/TAPE

CBL

/SAT

(AC-3)

OUT

(REC)

PHONO

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

FREQUENCY

STEP

FM AM

SURROUND

(PLAY)

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

L R L

D-TV/LD

MONITOR

OUT

OUTPUT

GND

L R

INPUT OUTPUT INPUTOUTPUT

OUTPUT

COAXIAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

INPUT

OPTICAL

INPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

SUBWOOFER

OUTPUT

CENTER OUTPUT

MAIN

OUTPUT

SURROUND

OUTPUT

L R

indicates signal direction

indicates left analog cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates optical cables

indicates coaxial cables

MD recorder or

tape deck

CD recorder

CD player

Turntable

External decoder

See page 18.

(General model)

0103V1000_11-18_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM13

CONNECTIONS

• Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input

through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are

output through the corresponding composite video, S-video,

and component jacks, respectively.

• If you make S-video connections to this unit, it is not necessary

to make composite video connections. If both types of

connections are made, this unit gives priority to the S-video

signal.

• You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A

and B jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O

ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see page 41 for details).

Notes

• Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when

connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

• When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being

connected.

■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

Connecting Video Components

■ About the video jacks

There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composite video

signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals.

The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (P

, P

) video signals. The jacks are also separated

into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component

(e.g. Y, C

, C

/Y, P

, P

/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction.

If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the

S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks

on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

VIDEO jack

(composite)

S VIDEO jack COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Game console

■ About the q RF (AC-3) signal input jack (China and general models

only)

S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

VIDEO AUX

AUDIO OUT R

AUDIO OUT L

VIDEO OUT

OPTICAL OUT

S VIDEO OUT

These jacks are used to connect any video input source

such as a game console to this unit.

(AC-3)

COAXIAL:

SELECT BY SETMENU

If your LD player has a Dolby Digital RF (AC-3) signal

output jack, connect it to the q RF (AC-3) input jack on

this unit. If the Dolby Digital RF (AC-3) and analog

signals are input at the same time, priority is given to the

RF signals. When you want to reproduce the Dolby

Digital RF (AC-3) signals, set the input mode to D.D. RF

by using INPUT MODE (see page 26).

Notes

• The Dolby Digital RF (AC-3) signals cannot be output by

using the REC OUT selector. When you record sound or

images from an LD player, be sure to connect the player to

either the DIGITAL OPTICAL or analog audio jacks.

• Even if you connect an LD player with the Dolby Digital RF

(AC-3) output jack to this unit, you cannot reproduce Dolby

Digital sound from all LD discs. You must playback an LD

encoded with Dolby Digital signals in order to take advantage

of the Dolby Digital sound.

0103V1000_11-18_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM14

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

TUNER

DIGITAL INPUT

REMOTE CONTROL

6CH INPUT

MD/

TAPE

CD-R

ANT

GND

RS-

232C

UNBAL.

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL:

SELECT BY SETMENU

(PLAY)

DVD

S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT

DVD

PR/

S VIDEO VIDEO

D-TV

/LD

CBL

/SAT

VCR 1

OUT

VCR 2

/DVR

OUT

ZONE 2 OUT

MONITOR

OUT

100 kHz/10 kHz

50 kHz/ 9 kHz

MD/TAPE

CBL

/SAT

(AC-3)

OUT

(REC)

PHONO

MAIN

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

FREQUENCY

STEP

FM AM

SURROUND

(PLAY)

CD-R

OUT

(REC)

L R L

D-TV/LD

PR/

MONITOR

OUT

PR/

DVD

D-TV

/LD

OPTICAL

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

S VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

AUDIO INPUT

AUDIO OUTPUT

COAXIAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

S VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

COMPONENT

INPUT

COMPONENT

OUTPUT

COMPONENT

OUTPUT

S S

TV/digital TV or

LD player

DVD player

Note

(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Singapore models only)

• If your LD player has a Dolby Digital RF signal output jack,

connect it to this unit through an RF demodulator (separately

purchased).

Cable TV or

satellite tuner

VCR 1 or

VCR 2/DVR (digital

video recorder)

(General model)

Video monitor

LD player

indicates signal direction

indicates left analog cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates optical cables

indicates coaxial cables

indicates video cables

indicates S-video cables

0103V1000_11-18_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM15

CONNECTIONS

10 mm (3/8”)

Connecting the Speakers

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

CAUTION

• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could

damage the unit and/or speakers.

If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers

in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers.

■ Speaker cables

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One of the cables is colored or

shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.

1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation

from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable

together to prevent short circuits.

■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals

1 Unscrew the knob.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

(U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China and general models only)

• Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the

knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of

the corresponding terminal.

Red: positive (+)

■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals

One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either

of the MAIN A or B terminals.

■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals

A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.

■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

Black: negative (–)

0103V1000_11-18_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM16

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

SPEAKERS PRE OUT/MAIN IN

MAIN

CENTER

REAR

(SURROUND)

MAIN

OUT

REAR

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

R L

–

R L

–

– –

REAR

(SURROUND)

MAIN A OR B: 4

MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 6

MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN A OR B: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR

: 8

MIN. /SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

Main speakers A

Right Left

Main speakers B

Right Left

(General model)

Center speaker Subwoofer

system

Subwoofer connection

See “SUBWOOFER jack”

on page 18.

Rear speakers

Right Left

Rear center

speaker

Power

amplifier

■ Using the rear center speaker

You can enjoy the Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software by adding the rear center speaker to the 5-

speaker configuration.

Rear center speaker placement

Place the rear center speaker in the center between the left and right rear speakers at the same height from the floor as

the rear speakers.

Connecting the rear center speaker

1 Connect the PRE OUT REAR CENTER jack on this unit to the input jack on the separately

prepared power amplifier.

2 Connect the rear center speaker to the speaker terminals on this power amplifier.

Note

• Be sure to correctly connect the + terminal of the speaker to the + terminal on the power amplifier, and the – terminal of the speaker

to the – terminal on the power amplifier.

Setting up this unit for using the rear center speaker

When you use a rear center speaker, “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU must be set to LRG or SML (see page 39).

Note

• No sound is output from the rear center speaker when “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE (see page 38 for

details).

0103V1000_11-18_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM17

CONNECTIONS

Connecting to an External

Amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.

Note

• When RCA pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for

output to an external amplifier, do not use the corresponding

SPEAKERS terminals.

1 MAIN jacks

• MAIN IN jacks

Line input to this unit’s main channel amplifiers.

• MAIN OUT jack

Main channel line output jacks.

Note

• The signals output through these jacks are affected by the

BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION settings.

2 REAR CENTER jack

Rear center channel line output jack.

3 CENTER jack

Center channel line output jack.

4 REAR (SURROUND) jacks

Rear channel line output jacks.

PRE OUT/MAIN IN

MAIN

OUT

REAR

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

R L

REAR

(SURROUND)

5 SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier,

including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing

Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the

subwoofer system to this jack.

Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or

rear channels are directed to this jack. (The cut-off

frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency

effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is

decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack.

Notes

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer. The subwoofer volume cannot be adjusted from

this unit.

• Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “10A LFE

LEVEL” and “11 DTS LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU,

some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack.

Connecting an External Decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left

and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND

and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from

an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the

6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right

outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and

surround channels.

Notes

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and

you cannot listen to DSP programs.

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing

items 1A to 1F on the SET MENU is not affected.

0103V1000_11-18_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM18

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

CONNECTIONS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch

WARNING

Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise the unit

may be damaged.

If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the

standby mode.

Select the left or right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch

only when this unit is in the standby mode.

Switch

position

Speaker

Impedance level

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each

speaker must be 4 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

Center

Rear

The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.

Main

If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.

[Canada model only]

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

Center

The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher.

Rear

MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6 MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

Left

Right

Main

Connecting the Power Supply Cords

After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if

you will not use this unit for a long period of time.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and

general models .............................................. 2 OUTLETS

Australia model ............................................... 1 OUTLET

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S)

is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM

POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply

power to any connected component whenever this unit is

turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption

of components) that can be connected to the AC

OUTLET(S) is 100 W.

(General model)

To AC outlet

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and general models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

(General model)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER

B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 6 MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER

MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER

MIN. /SPEAKER

CENTER

: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER

REAR : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

SWITCHED

100W MAX. TOTAL

AC OUTLETS

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

SWITCHED

0104V1000_19-23_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM19

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD)

Selecting the OSD Mode

1 When you turn on the power, the video

monitor and front panel display show the

level of the main volume for a few seconds

and then switch to show the current DSP

program.

2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control

repeatedly to change the display mode.

The OSD mode changes in the following order: full

display, short display, and display off.

You can display the operation information for this unit on

a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP

program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier

to see the available options and parameters than it is by

reading this information on the front panel display.

• If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is

superimposed over the image.

• The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will

not be recorded with any video signal.

• You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when

a video source is not being reproduced (or the source

component is turned off) by using “14 DISPLAY SET” on the

SET MENU (see page 44).

OSD Modes

You can change the amount of information the OSD

shows.

Full display

This mode always shows the DSP program parameter

settings on the video monitor (see page 69).

Short display

This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front

panel display at the bottom of the screen and then

disappears.

Display off

This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message

at the bottom of the screen and then disappears.

Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the

monitor except those of the ON SCREEN button.

Full display Short display

• When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h,

VOLUME and some other types of operation information are

displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that

for the front panel display.

• The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the

OSD mode.

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

Notes

• If you choose a video input source that has a component

connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN

jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO

OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is

output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks.

However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no

video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video

and composite video signals.

• If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to

connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see

the OSD.

• Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or

video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images.

P01 CONCERT HALL 1

INIT. DLY

30ms

ROOM SIZE 1.0

LIVENESS

P01 CONCERT HALL 1

0104V1000_19-23_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM20

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS

This unit has 6 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your

configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings

as well as other possible settings. If the initial settings are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, change the

settings on the SET MENU (see page 36).

Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F

Item Description Initial setting

1A CENTER SP

LRG

Selects the center channel output mode according to the size of the center speaker.

The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE.

1B MAIN

SP Selects the main channel output mode according to the size of the main speakers.

The possible settings are LARGE and SMALL.

LARGE

1C REAR L/R SP Selects the rear channel output mode according to the size of the rear speakers.

The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE.

LRG

1D REAR CT SP Selects the rear center channel output according to the size of the rear center

speaker.

The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE.

NONE

1E LFE/BASS OUT Selects a speaker for the LFE signal output and low bass signal.

The possible settings are SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, and BOTH.

BOTH

1F MAIN LEVEL Selects the output level for the main channel signal.

The possible settings are Normal and –10 dB.

Normal

0104V1000_19-23_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM21

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

This section explains how to adjust the speaker output

levels by using the test tone generator. When this

adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening

position will be the same from each speaker. This is

important for the best performance of the digital sound

field processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby

Digital decoder and DTS decoder.

Note

• Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are

connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from

the PHONES jack when using the test tone.

Before You Begin

STANDBY

/ON

1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power.

Turn on the video monitor.

2 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you are using two sets of the

main speakers, press both A

and B.

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

ON OFF

BASS

–

TREBLE

–

Remote control

PARAMETER

SET MENU

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

STANDBY

/ON

DISC

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

SPEAKERS

Front panel

3 Set BASS and TREBLE on the front panel to

the center position and set BASS

EXTENSION to OFF.

Front panel

4 Sit in the listening

position and set

PARAMETER/SET MENU

on the remote control to

PARAMETER.

Front panel

Set to OFF.

0104V1000_19-23_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM22

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS

TEST

VOLUME

–

LEFT SURROUND

(TEST L SUR.)

RIGHT SURROUND

(TEST R SUR.)

CENTER

(TEST CENTER)

REAR CENTER

(TEST R CENTER)

RIGHT

(TEST RIGHT)

LEFT

(TEST LEFT)

Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY

SUR.)

Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the

6 speakers required for a surround sound system. The

adjustment of each speaker output level should be made

at your listening position with the remote control. After

completing the adjustments, use VOLUME +/– at your

listening position to check if the adjustments are

satisfactory.

1 Press TEST to output the test tone.

2 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test

tone.

The test tone is heard from the left main speaker,

center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker,

rear center speaker (see page 17) and left rear

speaker in order. The tone is produced for

2.5 seconds each time.

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

–– –

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

1,5

The state of the test tone output is also shown on the

monitor by an image of the audio listening room.

This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level.

• If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the

center channel sound is automatically output from the left and

right main speakers.

Note

• If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the

unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections.

3 Press k / n repeatedly to

select the speaker to be

adjusted.

• You can stop the sequence temporarily by holding down k / n.

4 Press –/+ repeatedly to

adjust the output level of

the effect speakers so that

the output level coming

from each speaker is the

same.

While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the

selected speaker.

5 When the adjustment is complete, press

TEST.

The test tone stops and the

current DSP program appears

on the front panel display and

on the video monitor.

• The tonal quality of the center speaker can be adjusted by using

“5 CENTER GEQ” on the SET MENU (see page 41).

• You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers

(center, left rear, right rear and rear center) to +10 dB. If the

output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main

speakers even after you have increased the output level of these

speakers up to +10 dB, set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET

MENU to –10 dB (see page 40). This setting decreases the

main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal

level. After you have set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET

MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center, rear and rear

center speakers again.

TEST

TEST DOLBY SUR.

LEFT

0104V1000_19-23_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM23

BASIC PLAYBACK

1 Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) to

turn on the power. Turn on the video

monitor.

The front panel display and the video monitor show

the level of the main volume for a few seconds and

then switch to show the current DSP program.

2 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers to be used.

If you are using two sets of

main speakers, press both A

and B.

3 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one

of the input selector buttons) to select the

input source.

• The current input source is indicated on the front

panel display with an arrow.

• The current input source name and input mode

appear on the front panel display and on the video

monitor for a few seconds.

Front panel

Remote control

Selected input source

To reproduce the signal from

this component

Select this:

DVD: DVD player

D-TV/LD: TV or digital TV/LD player

CBL/SAT: Cable TV/satellite tuner

VCR 1: Video cassette recorder 1

VCR 2/DVR: Video cassette recorder 2/digital

video recorder

V-AUX: Another A/V component (connected to

the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front

panel)

PHONO: Turntable

CD: CD player

TUNER: AM/FM tuner

CD-R: CD recorder

MD/TAPE: MD recorder/tape deck

BASIC OPERATION

SPEAKERS

INPUT

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITALDOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENTPRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORTNEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

STANDBY

/ON

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Front panel

STANDBY

/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

Remote control

0105V1000_24-29_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM24

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

6 Use the digital sound field processor.

See page 28.

To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks

Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the

front panel display and on the video monitor.

6CH INPUT

Front panel

Remote control

Notes

• If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and on

the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select

another input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector

buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the

front panel display and the video monitor.

• If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video

source and then press 6CH INPUT.

4 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the

component.

5 Adjust the volume to the desired output

level.

If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS

EXTENSION, etc. These controls are only effective

for sound from the main speakers.

BASS

–

TREBLE

–

VOLUME

–

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel

Note

• If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR

OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the

reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be

lowered. In these cases, turn on the component.

PROGRAM

Front panel

Remote control

■ To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the

remote control.

To restore the audio output to

the previous volume level,

press MUTE again.

• You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such

as VOLUME +/–.

• During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the front panel

display and on the video monitor.

■ When you have finished using

this unit

Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY) to set

this unit in the standby mode.

■ Notes on the digital signal

The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle

96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a

source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and

set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation

instructions for the player.) Note the following when a

96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit:

1. The following indication will appear on the front panel

display.

2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be

output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the

left and right main speakers.

Note

• If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL or “1E

LFE/BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output

from the subwoofer.

3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on

page 45 cannot be made.

MUTE

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

10KEY DSP

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

ON OFF

0105V1000_24-29_EN 8/29/0, 1:33 PM25

BASIC PLAYBACK

■ BGV (background video) function

The BGV function allows you to combine a video image

from a video source with a sound from an audio source.

(For example, you can listen to classical music while you

are watching a video.)

Select a source from the video group and then select a

source from the audio group with the input selector

buttons on the remote control. The BGV function does

not work if you select the sources with INPUT l / h on

the front panel.

AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is

automatically selected in the following

order:

1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal

2) Digital (PCM) signal

3) Analog signal

DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal

encoded with DTS is selected even if

another signal is input at the same time.

ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal

is selected even if a digital signal is input

at the same time.

When LD is selected as the input source (China

and general models only)

AUTO: In this mode, this unit automatically

selects the signal in the following order:

1) Dolby Digital RF signal

2) DTS signal

3) Digital (PCM) signal

4) Analog signal

D.D. RF: This unit only selects the Dolby Digital RF

signal.

DTS: This unit only selects the DTS signal.

DGTL: This unit only selects digital (PCM) signal

input through the OPTICAL jacks.

ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal

is selected even if a digital signal is input

at the same time.

Notes

• If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is

selected.

• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the

type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate

setting and reproduces 5.1 channel source.

• The sound output may be interrupted for some LD and DVD

players in the following situation: The input mode is set to

AUTO. A search is performed while playing the disc encoded

with Dolby Digital or DTS, and then disc playing is restored.

The sound output is interrupted for a moment because the

digital signal was selected again.

INPUT MODE

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

Front panel

Remote control

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITALDOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENTPRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORTNEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

Input mode

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

Remote control

Input Modes and Indications

This unit comes with various input jacks. If your

component is connected to more than one type of input

jack, you can set the priority of the input signal.

When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode

is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU

(see page 42 for details).

Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector

button that you have pressed to select the

input source on the remote control)

repeatedly until the desired input mode is

shown on the front panel display and on the

video monitor.

0105V1000_24-29_EN 8/29/0, 1:34 PM26

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

■ Notes on playing an LD source

• For LD software that does not contain a digital

soundtrack, connect the LD player to the analog jacks

and set the input mode to AUTO or ANALOG.

• If the LD player is transmitting a signal by a non-

standard method, this unit cannot detect the Dolby

Digital or DTS signal. In this case, the decoder

automatically switches to PCM or analog.

• Some A/V components such as LD players output

different audio signals through their analog and digital

jacks. Change the input mode as necessary.

• While you are operating the LD player and playing a

disc encoded with a Dolby Digital signal, if you

switch from the pause or chapter forwarding function

to normal playback, you may hear the PCM or analog

sound an instant before the Dolby Digital signal is

played.

• (China and general models only) See page 14 about

the q RF (AC-3) input jack.

■ Notes on playing a source

encoded with a DTS signal

• If the digital output data of the player has been

processed in any way, you may not be able to perform

DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection

between this unit and the player.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and

set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces

the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you

want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the

source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to

AUTO or DTS.

• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while

playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit

reproduces no sound.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and

set the input mode to AUTO, there will be a moment

of noise while the unit recognizes the DTS signal and

turns on the DTS decoder. This is not a malfunction.

You can avoid this by setting the input mode to DTS

beforehand.

• If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS

signal with the input mode setting left to AUTO, this

unit automatically switches to the “DTS-decoding”

mode to prevent noise from being generated during

subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator lights up

on the front panel display.) The “t” indicator will

flash immediately after playback of a source encoded

with a DTS signal has finished. Only a source encoded

with a DTS signal can be played back while this

indicator is flashing. If you want to play a normal

PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO.

• The “t” indicator will flash when the input mode

is set to AUTO and a search or skip operation is

performed while playing back a source encoded with a

DTS signal. If this status continues for 30 or more

seconds, the unit will automatically switch from the

“DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input

mode and the “t” indicator will go out.

0105V1000_24-29_EN 8/29/0, 4:27 PM27

BASIC PLAYBACK

Selecting a Sound Field Program

You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a

DSP program. For details about each program, see pages

63 to 66.

Notes

• Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and

not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening

room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections

in your room to maximize the effect created by the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last DSP program used with that source.

• When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source

and DSP program are memorized and are automatically

selected when you turn on the power again.

• If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode

is set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the

appropriate decoding program.

• When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/

Normal or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard

from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only

be heard from the center speaker. However, if “1A CENTER

SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel

sound is output from the main speakers.

• When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit

is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used.

• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the

DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is

reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo.

■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS

ES decoder

If you want to utilize the rear center speaker with a 5.1

channel source, press 6.1/ES. However, note that to

achieve the proper effect with the rear center channel, the

Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software should

be used (see “12 6.1/ES AUTO” on pages 43 and 66 for

details).

1 Set 10KEY/DSP to DSP on

the remote control.

10KEY DSP

HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

6.1/ES

CHP/INDEX

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Remote control

2 Press one of the DSP program group

buttons (or PROGRAM l / h on the front

panel) repeatedly until the DSP program you

want appears on the front panel display and

on the video monitor.

For example, to select the sub-program “Spectacle,”

press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly.

PROGRAM

Front panel

Remote control

Program group

Program name (sub-program)

Remote control

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

STANDBY

/ON

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

The “ c ” indicator lights up.

0105V1000_24-29_EN 8/29/0, 1:34 PM28

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC PLAYBACK

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT

CINEMA DSP

You can experience the virtual CINEMA DSP sound field

by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to

NONE. The sound field processing is changed to the

Virtual CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected

DSP program. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by

using the main speakers. You can also listen to SILENT

CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the

PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is

on.

Note

• This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if

“1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases:

– when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal or DTS/

Normal program is selected;

– when the sound effect is turned off;

– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;

– when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;

– when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played;

– when using the test tone; or

– when connecting the headphones.

EFFECT

Front panel

Remote control

Notes

• If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the

center, rear and rear center speakers.

• If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is

automatically compressed and the sounds of the center, rear

and rear center channels are mixed and output from the main

speakers.

• The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the

sound effect or if you set “10B D-RANGE” on the SET MENU

to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.

Normal Stereo Reproduction

Press EFFECT to turn off the sound effect

for normal stereo reproduction.

Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back

on.

0105V1000_24-29_EN 8/29/0, 1:34 PM29

TUNING

Connecting the Antennas

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal

strength.

Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals.

AM loop antenna

(included)

Indoor FM

antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A good

earth ground is a metal stake driven

into moist earth.

■ Connecting the indoor FM

antenna

Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the 75Ω

UNBAL. FM ANT terminal.

Note

• Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM

antenna at the same time.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

Antenna stand

1 Press and hold the tab to unlock the

terminal hole.

2 Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into

the AM ANT and GND terminals.

3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires.

Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good

connection.

4 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna

stand.

5 Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best

reception is obtained.

• The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and

attached to a wall, etc.

Notes

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer

reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the

quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA

dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas.

FREQUENCY STEP switch

(China and general models only)

Because the interstation frequency spacing

differs in different areas, set the

FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating at

the rear) according to the frequency

spacing in your area.

North, Central and South America:

100 kHz/10 kHz

Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz

Before setting this switch, disconnect the

AC power plug of this unit from the AC

outlet.

100 kHz/10 kHz

50 kHz/ 9 kHz

FREQUENCY

STEP

FM AM

DIGITAL OUTPUT

TUNER

DIGITAL INPUT

REMOTE CONTROL

MD/

TAPE

CD-R

DVD

ANT

GND

RS-

232C

D-TV

/LD

UNBAL.

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL:

SELECT BY SETMENU

CBL

/SAT

(AC-3)

OUT

(General model)

0106V1000_30-35_EN 8/29/0, 1:34 PM30

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TUNING

Automatic (or Manual) Tuning

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display

next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING

(EDIT) to turn it off.

• Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not

stop at the desired station because the signal is weak.

• When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up

and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front

panel display.

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

you must tune in to it manually.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from

the front panel display.

INPUT

FM/AM

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

STANDBY

/ON

423

1 Press INPUT l / h to

select TUNER as the input

source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.

Lights up

Turn this indicator off.

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITALDOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAIN

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l or h once to

begin automatic tuning.

Press h to tune in to a higher

frequency, or press l to tune

in to a lower frequency. Press

the same button again if the

tuning search does not stop at

the desired station.

PRESET/

TUNING

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITALDOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAIN

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

Turn this indicator off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue the tuning search.

Note

• Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change

the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.

AUTO

Goes off

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display

next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING

(EDIT) to turn it off.

PRESET/

TUNING

0106V1000_30-35_EN 8/29/0, 1:34 PM31

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITALDOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENTPRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORTNEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

FM/AM

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

STANDBY

/ON

Presetting Stations

■ Automatically presetting stations

(for FM stations)

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables the unit to

automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those

stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in

to any preset station by selecting the preset station

number (see page 33).

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or

AM station by simply following the procedure in the section

“Manually presetting stations” on page 33.

• If the number of the received stations does not reach E8,

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually

in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure

in “Manually presetting stations” on page 33.

Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which the unit will

store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after

pressing MEMORY in step 3):

1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to

select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward lower frequencies.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If

so, store the stations again by using the presetting

station methods.

Lights up

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO”

indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds,

automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency

currently displayed toward the higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the

front panel display shows the frequency of the last

preset station.

0106V1000_30-35_EN 8/29/0, 1:34 PM32

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TUNING

■ Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5

groups) manually.

1 Tune in to a station.

See page 31 for tuning instructions.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about

5 seconds.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the

“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.

The station band and

frequency appear on the front

panel display with the preset

group and number you have

selected.

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

STANDBY

/ON

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

–– –

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITALDOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENTPRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORTNEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITALDOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAIN

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

PRESET/

TUNING

Shows the displayed station has been stored as A1.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

Tuning in to a Preset Station

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

You can also tune a preset station with the remote

control. Press TUNER to select TUNER as the input

source.

Flashes

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a

preset station group (A to E) while the

“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears and make sure that the

colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to

the band indication.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher

preset station number. Press l

to select a lower preset station

number.

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

STANDBY

/ON

4 2,53

0106V1000_30-35_EN 8/29/0, 1:34 PM33

TUNING

1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station

group.

The preset group letter appears on the front panel

display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E.

PRESET/

TUNING

PRESET

DISC

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITALDOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENTPRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

NEWS INFO AF

MEMORY

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITALDOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENTPRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORTNEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

Exchanging Preset Stations

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Tune in to preset station “E1”.

See “Tuning in to a Preset Station” on page 33.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

3 Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the

buttons on the front panel.

“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

STANDBY

/ON

2,4

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITALDOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENTPRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORTNEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

Front panel

A/B/C/D/E

A / B / C / D / E

TV INPUT

Front panel

Remote control

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or

PRESET +/–) to select a preset station

number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear on the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.

Shows the exchange of stations

has been completed.

Remote control

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORTNEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DIGITAL

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

VIRTUAL

0106V1000_30-35_EN 8/29/0, 1:34 PM34

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

BASIC RECORDING

REC OUT/ZONE 2 allows you to record one source

while watching and/or listening to another source.

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for these components.

1 Turn on the power to the unit and all

connected components.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from by using REC OUT/ZONE 2.

• To record the current input source, set REC OUT/

ZONE 2 to SOURCE/REMOTE.

• To record a source that you do not want to

simultaneously watch or listen to, set REC OUT/

ZONE 2 to the source you want to record.

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

If you want to listen to another source, and REC

OUT/ZONE 2 is not set to SOURCE/REMOTE,

select the source you want to reproduce with INPUT

l / h and adjust the volume.

• Setting REC OUT/ZONE 2 to SOURCE/REMOTE and using

the BGV function (see page 26) allows the recording of audio

and video from a different source.

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VCR2

/DVR

V-AUX

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

D-TV/LD

DVD

SOURCE

/REMOTE

REC OUT/ZONE 2

A/B/C/D/E

SPEAKERS

BASS

EXTENSION

PROCESSOR

DIRECT

PRESET/

TUNING

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

BASS

6CH INPUT

VOLUME

INPUT

INPUT MODE

–

TREBLE

–

PRESET

/TUNING

EDIT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

FM/AM

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

SILENT

VIDEO AUX

EFFECT

PROGRAM

ON OFF

SURROUND

DIGITAL

STANDBY

/ON

Notes

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

• The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION,

VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP

programs does not affect the recorded material.

• A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot

be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source component is

connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite

video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a

composite video) signal by your VCR.

• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output on VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material

may infringe copyright laws.

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

■ Special considerations when

recording DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS

Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded as

follows:

• LDs

Set your LD player’s left and right outputs to the

analog soundtrack.

• DVDs

Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-

channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or

Dolby Digital soundtrack.

• CDs

The DTS signal recorded on CDs can only be output

as a digital bitstream, and therefore cannot be

recorded.

0106V1000_30-35_EN 8/29/0, 1:34 PM35

SET MENU

ADVANCED OPERATION

The SET MENU consists of 15 items including the

speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and

parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate

item and adjust or select the values as necessary.

• You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a

source.

• We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU

while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video

monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit

while adjusting the items.

Note

• The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of

the OSD.

1 SPEAKER SET

1A CENTER SP

1B MAIN SP

1C REAR L/R SP

1D REAR CT SP

1E LFE/BASS OUT

1F MAIN LEVEL

2 LOW FRQ TEST

3 L/R BALANCE

4 HP TONE CTRL

5 CENTER GEQ

6 INPUT RENAME

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT

8 INPUT MODE

9 PARAM. INI

10 DOLBY D. SET

10A LFE LEVEL

10B D-RANGE

11 DTS LFE LEVEL

12 6.1/ES AUTO

13 SP DELAY TIME

14 DISPLAY SET

15 MEMORY GUARD

Adjusting the Items on the SET

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

Note

• Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting.

1 Set PARAMETER/SET

MENU to SET MENU.

2 Press k / n repeatedly to select the item (1 to

15) you want to adjust.

3 Press – or + once to enter the setup mode of

the selected item.

The last setting you adjusted appears on the video

monitor or on the front panel display.

PARAMETER

SET MENU

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

CHP/INDEX

–– –

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

2,5

3,4

2 LOW FRQ TEST

TEST TONE • • • • • OFF

OUTPUT • • • MAIN L/R

FRQ • • • • • • • • • • 88Hz

SET MENU 1/4

1 SPEAKER SET

2 LOW FRQ TEST

3 L/R BALANCE

4 HP TONE CTRL

:Up/Down

–/+ Enter

0107V1000_36-46_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM36

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode

settings)

Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your

speaker configuration. You must set the output mode

when you use a subwoofer.

Notes

• When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit,

level adjustments in items 1B and 1E are possible, but those in

items 1A, 1C, 1D and 1F are not affected.

• When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level

adjustments in items 1A through 1F are not affected.

■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker

mode)

By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,

the unit can provide good dialog localization for many

listeners and superior synchronization of sound and

images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center

speaker depending on how you set this item.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire

range of the center channel signal is directed to the center

speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E

LFE/BASS OUT”.

Depending on the item, press k / n to select a sub

item.

2 LOW FRQ TEST

TEST TONE • • • • • OFF

OUTPUT • • • MAIN L/R

FRQ • • • • • • • • • 88Hz

4 Press –/+ repeatedly to change the setting of

the item.

5 Press k / n repeatedly until the current DSP

program appears or simply press one of the

DSP program group buttons to exit from the

SET MENU.

HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

10KEY DSP

1A CENTER SP

LRG

SML

NONE

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the settings of the SET MENU you

adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust

the items again.

1A CENTER SP

LRG

SML

NONE

2 LOW FRQ TEST

TEST TONE • • • • • •ON

OUTPUT • • • MAIN L/R

FRQ • • • • • • • • • 88Hz

0107V1000_36-46_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM37

SET MENU

NONE

Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the

center channel signals are directed to the left and right

main speakers.

■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode)

The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending

on how you set this item.

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

Initial setting: LARGE

LARGE

Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire

range of the left and right main channel signal is directed

to the left and right main speakers.

SMALL

Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel

are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS

OUT”.

Note

• When you select MAIN for “1E LFE/BASS OUT”, the low-

frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are

directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the

main speaker mode.

■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker

mode)

The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers

depending on how you set this item.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: LRG

LRG

Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or

if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The

entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the

left and right rear speakers.

SML

Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers.

The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E

LFE/BASS OUT”.

NONE

Select this if you do not have rear speakers. In this case,

the rear center speaker mode will automatically be set to

NONE and “1D REAR CT SP” will be skipped.

• This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting

NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP”.

1A CENTER SP

LRG

SML

NONE

1B MAIN SP

LARGE

SMALL

1B MAIN SP

LARGE

SMALL

1C REAR L/R SP

LRG

SML

NONE

1C REAR L/R SP

LRG

SML

NONE

1C REAR L/R SP

LRG

SML

NONE

0107V1000_36-46_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM38

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

■ 1D REAR CT SP (rear center

speaker mode)

By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker

configuration, the unit can provide more realistic front-to-

back and back-to-front transitions.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE

Initial setting: NONE

LRG

Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The

entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to

the rear center speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The

low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

center channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“1E LFE/BASS OUT”.

NONE

Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of

the rear center channel signals are directed to the left and

right rear speakers.

■ 1E LFE/BASS OUT (bass out

mode)

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency

signals are defined as 90 Hz and below.

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH

Initial setting: BOTH

SWFR

Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are

directed to the subwoofer.

MAIN

Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE

signals are directed to the main speakers.

BOTH

Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix

the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE

signals.

Note

• The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main,

center, rear and rear center (see page 17) channels are directed

to the LFE channel when you select the small speaker setting in

items 1A, 1B, 1C and 1D.

1D REAR CT SP

LRG

SML

NONE

1D REAR CT SP

LRG

SML

NONE

1D REAR CT SP

LRG

SML

NONE

1E LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR

MAIN BOTH

1E LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR

MAIN BOTH

1E LFE/BASS OUT

SWFR

MAIN BOTH

0107V1000_36-46_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM39

SET MENU

■ 1F MAIN LEVEL (main level

mode)

Change this setting if you cannot match the output level

of the center and rear speakers with the main speakers

because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of

the main speakers.

Choices: Normal, –10 dB

Initial setting: Normal

Normal

Select this if you can match the output level of your effect

speakers with that of your main speakers when using the

test tone.

–10 dB

Select this if you cannot match the output level of your

effect speakers with that of your main speakers when

using the test tone.

2 LOW FRQ TEST

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the

subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your

configuration. Change the setting with the remote control

while sitting in the listening position.

1 Press –/+ to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and

adjust the volume with VOLUME +/– so you

can hear the tone.

Notes

• Do not turn up the volume too high.

• If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in

the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections

are correct.

2 Press n to go to “OUTPUT” and press –/+ to

select the speaker you want to compare with

the subwoofer.

If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will

not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will

not necessarily be output from the selected speakers.

The output mode of the test tone depends on the

settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU.

3 Press n to go to “FRQ” and press –/+ to

select the frequency you want to use.

4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the

controls on the subwoofer so it matches that

of the speaker you are comparing it to.

■ About the test tone

The test tone is produced by the tone generator.

The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise

centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter.

You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through

250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps.

You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the

subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency

characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency

sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position,

speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other

conditions.

1F MAIN LEVEL

Normal

–10dB

1F MAIN LEVEL

Normal

–10dB

Digital generator

(wide band noise produced)

Noise

Freq.

Center freq. 35 Hz – 250 Hz

Band pass filter

0107V1000_36-46_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM40

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the

left and right main speakers)

Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level

from the left and right main speakers.

Control range: 10 steps for L/R

Initial setting: 0

Press + to decrease the output level for the

left main speaker. Press – for the right main

speaker.

4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone

control)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble

when you use your headphones.

Control range (dB): –6 to +3

Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble)

5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic

equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic

equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches

that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the

100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies.

Control range (dB): –6 to +6

Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band

1 Press n to select a higher frequency and k

to select a lower frequency.

2 Press –/+ to adjust the level of that

frequency.

• You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this

item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the

foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the

video monitor, and the test tone starts alternating among the

speakers. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains

at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes

as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone,

press TEST (see pages 22 and 23).

6 INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the input which

appears on the OSD or the front panel display.

1 Press an input selector button (or use INPUT

l / h) to select the input you want to

change the name of.

2 Press –/+ to place the _ (under-bar) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

3 Press k / n to select the character you want

to use and –/+ to move to the next one.

• Press n to change the character in the following

order, or press k to go in the reverse order.

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #,

*, +, and so on.

• Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other

inputs.

Note

• You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs.

4 Press + repeatedly to exit from INPUT

RENAME.

7 I/O ASSIGNMENT

Use this feature to designate the input for the

COMPONENT jacks (A and B) and the DIGITAL

INPUT/OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8 (or 9 for the China and

general models only)) to any sources you want.

■ 7A [A] [B] (for the COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks)

Initial settings: [A] DVD

[B] D-TV/LD

■ 7B (1) (2) (for the OPTICAL

OUTPUT jacks)

Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE

(2) CD-R

■ 7C (3) to (6) (for the OPTICAL

INPUT jacks)

Initial settings: (3) CD

(4) CD-R

(5) DVD

(6) D-TV/LD

■ 7D (7) (8) (9 (China and general

models only)) (for the COAXIAL

INPUT jacks)

Initial settings: (7) CD

(8) CBL/SAT

(9) LD RF

Note

• You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of

jack.

0107V1000_36-46_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM41

SET MENU

L-LEVEL BST

H-LEVEL CUT

0.0

1.0

8 INPUT MODE (initial input

mode)

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn

on this unit (see page 26 for details about the input

mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

Initial setting: AUTO

AUTO

Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the

type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.

LAST

Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last

input mode used for that source.

9 PARAM. INI (parameter

initialization)

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP

program within a DSP program group. When you

initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter

values within that group revert to their initial settings.

Press the DSP program group button on the

remote control for the DSP program you

want to initialize.

All of the DSP programs within the selected program

group are initialized.

• The asterisk mark (*) next to a DSP program group number

indicates that you have changed the parameter values in one or

more DSP programs within that group.

Notes

• You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a

group separately.

• The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if

you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk

mark (*).

• When “15 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 44),

you cannot initialize any program groups.

• Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot

automatically revert to the previous parameter settings.

10 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital

set)

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes

Dolby Digital signals.

■ 10A LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a

Dolby Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the low-

frequency special effect sound which is only added to

certain scenes.

Control value (dB): –20 to 0

Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and

HEADPHONE

Note

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones.

■ 10B D-RANGE (dynamic range)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range.

Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN

Initial setting: MAX for both SP (speaker) and HP

(headphones)

• Select MAX for feature films.

• Select STD for general use.

• Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely

low volume level.

MAX

Output level

Dialog

level

Input level

STD

Output level

Dialog

level

Input level

MIN

Output level

Dialog

level

Input level

Note

• When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because

some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the

minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or

STD.

0107V1000_36-46_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM42

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SET MENU

13 SP DELAY TIME

Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center and rear

center channel sounds. This feature works when this unit

decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center

speaker and rear center speaker should be the same

distance from the listening position as the left and right

main speakers. However, in most home situations, the

center speaker or the rear center speaker is placed in line

with the main speakers or rear speakers. By delaying the

sound from the center speaker and the rear center speaker,

the apparent distance from the center speaker and the rear

center speaker to the listening position can be adjusted to

make it seem the same as the distance between the left

and right main speakers and the left and right rear

speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay

time for the center speaker is especially important for

giving depth to the dialog.

Control range (ms): 0 to 5 for the center speaker

0 to 30 for the rear center speaker

• Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers

about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening

position.

11 DTS LFE LEVEL

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS

signals.

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS

signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special

effect sound which is only added to certain scenes.

Control range (dB): –10 to +10

Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and

HEADPHONE

Note

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones.

12 6.1/ES AUTO

Use this feature to switch the audio mode of the Dolby

Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder on or off.

Choices: ON, OFF

Initial setting: ON

Select this to allow this unit to automatically turn on the

Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder when a

signal with the appropriate identification is detected.

OFF

Select this if you want to turn on or off the Dolby Digital

Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder manually by pressing 6.1/

ES on the remote control.

Center speaker image

Rear center speaker image

0107V1000_36-46_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM43

SET MENU

14 DISPLAY SET

■ BLUE BACK > AUTO/OFF

You can set the OSD background to blue if the video

source is not being reproduced (or the power of the

source component is off).

■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position)

This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the

OSD.

■ DIMMER

You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

15 MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other settings on this unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

Initial setting: OFF

Select ON to protect the following features:

• DSP program parameters

• All SET MENU items

• Center, rear, rear center (see page 17) speakers and

subwoofer levels

• The on-screen display (OSD) mode

Notes

• When “15 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use

the test tone.

• When “15 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select

any other SET MENU items.

0107V1000_36-46_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM44

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

3 Press –/+ to adjust the speaker output level.

• The control range for the center, left and right rear

or rear center speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB.

• The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB

to –20 dB.

• When PARAMETER/SET MENU is set to SET MENU, you

cannot adjust the output level by using LEVEL. However, each

time you press LEVEL, the current level of each speaker

appears on the front panel display and you can check the

speaker level.

Notes

• If the speaker output mode is set to NONE, the output level of

that speaker cannot be adjusted.

• When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you

made with the test tone will be changed.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the output level of the effect speakers

you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so,

adjust the output level again.

ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS

PARAMETER

SET MENU

LEVEL

You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker

(center, left and right rear, rear center (see page 17) and

subwoofer) while listening to a music source.

Adjustment should be made with the remote control.

1 Set PARAMETER/SET

MENU to PARAMETER.

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker(s) you want to adjust.

Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker

changes and appears on the front panel display and

on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear,

rear center (see page 17), left rear and subwoofer.

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

LEVEL

Center speaker output level

Right rear speaker output

level

Rear center speaker output

level

Left rear speaker output

level

Subwoofer output level

• Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to

be adjusted by pressing n. (Pressing k changes the selection in

the reverse order.)

0107V1000_36-46_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM45

SLEEP TIMER

3 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the

front panel display after the sleep timer has

been set.

The display then returns to the previous indication.

Canceling the Sleep Timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears on the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the

“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns

to the previous indication.

• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit

in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control

(or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the

AC power cord from the AC outlet.

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The

sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while

this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer

also automatically turns off the external components

connected to AC OUTLET(S).

The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.

• By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you

can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions

for the timer.

Setting the Sleep Timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of

time before this unit automatically turns off.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITALDOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENTPRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORTNEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

DIGITAL

DTS MOVIE THEATER 1DTS MOVIE THEATER 1

DOLBY DIGITALDOLBY DIGITAL

PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENTPRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT

DSP

6.1/ES

PCM

PRO LOGIC

D-TV/LD

CBL/SAT

VCR 1

VCR2/DVR

V-AUX

DVD

MD/TAPE

CD-R

TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

PTY

HOLD

EON

STEREO

AUTO

NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT

MEMORY TUNED

ZONE 2

VOLUME

SLEEP

DIGITAL

SLEEP

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

0107V1000_36-46_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM46

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

The remote control can operate this unit as well as other YAMAHA A/V components. To control the components from

other manufacturers (or some from YAMAHA), you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer codes.

This remote control also has two sophisticated features: Learn and Macro. The Learn feature allows it to acquire

functions from the remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with

an infrared remote control receiver. The Macro feature allows you to program a series of operations in sequence for

operation by a single button, or to use the factory-set macros to operate other YAMAHA components. These features

make it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment room.

Notes

• For the operating distance of the remote control and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 8.

• For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 and 7.

• If the memory on the remote control becomes full, no further learning is possible, even if there are still some programmable buttons

available (see page 56).

Control Area

■ Control area of this unit

The control area of this unit is the shaded area shown

below. You can use the functions within this area no

matter which component control area is selected.

■ Component control area

The component control area is the shaded area shown

below. Each component has different functions for the

operation buttons in the component control area. The

component which has been chosen by pressing an input

selector button can be controlled and the display window

shows the corresponding name of the input.

Input

selector

buttons

10KEY/DSP

(DSP is

selected)

Input selector

buttons and these

buttons also switch

the control area for

each component

10KEY/DSP

(10KEY is selected)

Component control area

There are 14 component control areas. You can set up the

manufacturer code and program other remote control functions in

each area (you cannot set up the manufacturer code in the OPTN

area). See pages 54 to 56.

These buttons

switch the

control area

Factory settings:

A for the LD

player and B for

the satellite tuner.

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

CHP/INDEX

–– –

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

CHP/INDEX

––

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

SOURCE

SELECT

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

–

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

CHP/INDEX

––

10KEY DSP

0108V1000_47-53_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM47

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ SOURCE SELECT k / n

You can control another component independently from

the input you have selected by pressing an input selector

button.

Press SOURCE SELECT k / n to choose the

component and set the remote control to be

used for it.

The display window will show one of the following:

(when pressing n) OPTN (option), A, B, PHONO, V-

AUX, TUNER, MD, CD-R, CD, TV/LD (TV or

digital TV/LD), CBSAT (cable TV/satellite tuner),

VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD.

• Pressing k shows the same in the reverse order, but you cannot

select OPTN.

■ OPTN (option) area

OPTN is an extra component control area that can be

programmed with other remote control functions.

Note

• You cannot set up the manufacturer code in this area. See

page 53 for the programmable area.

■ Zone 2 feature

When you make up a second audio-video room with this

unit’s Zone 2 feature, you must set “Zone2” as the

amplifier library in the remote control first. Selecting

“Zone2” by pressing k sets the remote control to the Zone

2 mode. See pages 61 and 62 for details.

SOURCE

SELECT

Pressing n always selects OPTN first

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

Pressing k selects “Zone2” first

0108V1000_47-53_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM48

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Each Component Control Area

The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the component

you have.

First, press an input selector button or SOURCE SELECT k / n to select a component you want to control.

• The YAMAHA code is factory set for the A, TUNER, MD/TAPE, CD, CD-R and DVD buttons. You must set up the manufacturer

code when operating your component (see page 54).

■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area)

Preset group A

Preset group B

Preset group A/B/C/D/E

PRESET +/–

Preset number 1 to 8

Preset group E

Preset group D

Preset group C

■ Operating a CD player (CD area)

POWER

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

DISPLAY

POWER

INDEX

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the

manufacturer code for

your TV in the D-TV/LD or

PHONO area.

Skip search

PLAY

PAUSE

(YAMAHA: Pause/Stop)

STOP

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Clear

Numeric button +10

Numeric button 0

DISC +/– (disc skip)

Note

• When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-

TV/LD area.

0108V1000_47-53_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM49

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Operating an MD recorder (MD/TAPE area)

■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R area)

DISPLAY

POWER

INDEX

Skip search

PLAY

STOP

PAUSE

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Clear

Numeric button +10

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the

manufacturer code for

your TV in the D-TV/LD or

PHONO area.

Numeric button 0

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

DISPLAY

POWER

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the

manufacturer code for

your TV in the D-TV/LD or

PHONO area.

Rec/Pause

Skip search

PLAY

PAUSE

STOP

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Numeric button +10

Numeric button 0

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Note

• When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-

TV/LD area.

Note

• When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-

TV/LD area.

0108V1000_47-53_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM50

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Operating an LD player (A area)

DISPLAY

POWER

STOP

Chapter/Time

Numeric button 0

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the

manufacturer code for

your TV in the D-TV/LD or

PHONO area.

SOUND

CHAPTER –/+ (chapter search)

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Clear

Numeric button +10

■ Operating a DVD player (DVD area)

TITLE

DISPLAY

POWER

Return

Title/Index

Numeric button 0

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT,

and TV MUTE function if

you have set up the

manufacturer code for

your TV in the D-TV/LD

or PHONO area.

Menu cursor/ENTER

Audio

Skip search

PLAY

PAUSE

STOP

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Clear

Numeric button +10

DISC +/– (disc skip)

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Notes

• The A button is not the input selector and only switches the component area for operating an LD player.

• When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-

TV/LD area.

Note

• When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-

TV/LD area.

0108V1000_47-53_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM51

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1, VCR 2/DVR and V-AUX areas)

Rewind/Fast forward

POWER

REC

(Press twice

to start

recording)

TV/Video input

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the

manufacturer code for

your TV in the D-TV/LD or

PHONO area.

PLAY

PAUSE

STOP

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Numeric button 10 or 0

CH +/– (channel)

■ Operating a TV/digital TV (D-TV/LD and PHONO areas)

Note

• If you operate an LD player in the D-TV/LD area, set the manufacturer code for your LD player in D-TV/LD area, and the

manufacturer code for your TV in PHONO area.

DISPLAY

POWER

Enter

TV INPUT

TV VOL +/–

TV MUTE

You can control your VCR

if you have set up the code for VCR 1.

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Numeric button 10 or 0

CH +/– (channel)

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Note

• When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-

TV/LD area.

0108V1000_47-53_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM52

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Operating a cable TV (CBL/SAT area) or satellite tuner (B area)

DISPLAY

POWER

Enter

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and

TV MUTE function if you

have set up the

manufacturer code for

your TV in the D-TV/LD or

PHONO area.

Menu cursor/Menu select

You can control your VCR

if you have set up the code for VCR 1.

Numeric buttons 1 to 9

Recall

Numeric button 0

CH +/– (channel)

■ Free area (OPTN area)

TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT,

and TV MUTE function if

you have set up the

manufacturer code for

your TV in the D-TV/LD

or PHONO area.

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Notes

• The B button is not the input selector and only switches the component area for operating a satellite tuner.

• When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-

TV/LD area.

Note

• When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-

TV/LD area.

0108V1000_47-53_EN 8/29/0, 1:35 PM53

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Setting the Manufacturer Code

You can control other components by setting a

manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each

component control area except for the OPTN area.

The YAMAHA code is factory set for A, TUNER, CD,

MD/TAPE, CD-R and DVD. There is no factory-set code

for B, PHONO, V-AUX, D-TV/LD, CBL/SAT, VCR 1

and VCR 2/DVR.

1 Press an input selector button, A or B to

select the source component you want to set

up.

2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

by using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“SETUP” and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

Notes

• Press LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning

process is started.

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during step 3,

the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from

step 2.

3 Press k / n to select the name of your

component’s manufacturer.

You will find the names of most worldwide audio-

video manufacturers in alphabetical order in the

display window.

4 Press POWER (or any other button) to check

if you have set up the code correctly.

If the component cannot be

controlled with the remote

control, try setting another

code for the same

manufacturer.

• If you continuously want to set up another code for another

component, press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4.

5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

Notes

• If you have already programmed a remote control function for

a button, the function by learning or macro programming takes

priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following

circumstances:

– when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER;

– when pressing more than one button at once; or

– when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET

MENU is switched to another position.

POWER

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

LEARN

0109V1000_54-62_EN 8/29/0, 1:26 PM54

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Controlling a different

component from the source

component (input) you have

selected

1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in

“Setting the Manufacturer Code”.

2 Press l / h to select a library (component

category).

There are 13 libraries to set up a manufacturer code:

L:TV, L:CAB (CABLE), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR,

L:DVD, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (TAPE),

L:TUN (TUNER) and *L:AMP.

3 Repeat steps 3 and 4 of the procedure in

“Setting the Manufacturer Code”.

About amplifier libraries (L:AMP)

L:AMP has 4 codes: YPC, Zone2, DSP, and No.

“YPC” or “Zone2” should be selected to operate this

unit. “DSP” is for operating YAMAHA DSP amplifiers

other than this unit. “No” is to clear this unit control

area functions.

Note

• “YPC” is factory-set as the amplifier library. When you

make up a second audio-video room with this unit’s Zone 2

feature, you must set “Zone2” as the amplifier library in the

remote control (see page 62 for details).

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

10KEY DSP

Programming a New Remote

Control Function (Learn Feature)

If you want to program functions not included in the basic

operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a

manufacturer code is not available, the following

procedure needs to be performed. The possible

programming area is the same as a component control

area, so the buttons are programmable independently for

each source component area.

Note

• This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote

control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn

most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you

may not be able to program some special signals or extremely

long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the

other remote control.)

1 Set 10KEY/DSP to 10KEY.

2 Press an input selector button, A or B to

select a source component.

3 Place this remote control and the other

remote control about 50 to 100 mm (2 to

4 in.) apart on a flat surface so that their

infrared transmitters are aimed at each other.

about 50 to 100 mm

(2 to 4 in.)

0109V1000_54-62_EN 8/29/0, 1:26 PM55

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

LEARN

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

4 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 5

and 6, the learning process is canceled. If this happens, start

over from step 4.

5 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

“LEARN” is displayed.

6 Press and hold the button on the other

remote control that has the function you

want to program into this remote control

until “OK” appears in the display window.

Notes

• “NG” appears in the display window when programming has

not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 5.

• When the memory is full, “FULL” appears in the display

window, and this remote control cannot acquire any more

functions. Clear unnecessary programmed functions to allow

this remote control to acquire new functions.

7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to program additional

functions.

8 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning

mode.

Notes

• It is also possible to program in the control area of this unit

with 10KEY/DSP set to DSP. However, if you program

functions in this area, you cannot control this unit and select a

DSP program.

• Even if the batteries in the other remote control have enough

power to transmit signals for operation, they may not have

enough power to transmit signals to this remote control.

• When the remote controls are either too close together or too

far apart, you may not be able to program this remote control.

• Direct sunlight interferes with infrared rays.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window in the following

circumstances:

– when pressing more than one button at once; or

– when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position.

0109V1000_54-62_EN 8/29/0, 1:26 PM56

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

(*4)

STANDBY

POWER

PLAY

CBL/SAT

DVD

D-TV/LD

CD-R

PHONO

MD/TAPE

VCR 2/DVR

VCR 1

V-AUX

TUNER

CBL/SAT

DVD

D-TV/LD

CD-R

STANDBY

PHONO

MD/TAPE

VCR 2/DVR

VCR 1

V-AUX

TUNER

SYSTEM

POWER

SYSTEM

POWER

PLAY

SYSTEM

POWER

–

Using the Macro Feature

The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations by pressing just one button. For example, when

you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to

start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all those operations by simply pressing the CD macro button. The

macro buttons (the input selector buttons, A and B buttons, SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY) are factory set with

macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 58).

Press one of the macro buttons Automatically transmits signals of each button sequentially

(CD area)

Macro buttons

First Second Third

(*1)

(MD/TAPE area) (*3)

(CD-R area) (*3)

(CD area) (*3)

(VCR 1 area) (*3)

(VCR 2/DVR area) (*3)

(DVD area) (*3)

(D-TV/LD area) (*2)

*1 In order to turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit, connect those components to the

AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details,

please refer to the operation instruction for the connected component.)

*2 If the macro you select includes power control functions, the component may be turned off if it is already on when you press the

macro button. For example, if your TV is on and you press the SYSTEM POWER macro button, the TV is turned off.

*3 Playback can be started with any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorders, CD players, CD recorders, DVD players,

and LD players. When using macros to operate other components, it is either necessary to program the PLAY button on the control

area of that component (see page 55) or to set up a manufacturer code (see page 54).

*4 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit receives the last station when this unit is set in the standby mode.

0109V1000_54-62_EN 8/29/0, 1:26 PM57

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

MACRO

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

■ Operating the macro

MACRO

MACRO ON/OFF

Macro buttons

1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.

2 Press a macro button.

Notes

• When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO

ON/OFF to OFF.

• While this unit is carrying out a macro program, the unit does

not receive any other button’s function until the macro

operation has been completed (the TRANSMIT indicator stops

flashing).

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation has been completed.

■ Programming a macro

You can program your own macros and use the Macro

feature to transmit many remote control commands by

pressing a single button.

Notes

• The factory-set macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The factory-set macro can be used

again when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the

factory-set macro. Programming a macro changes all macro

contents.

• A macro programming is used to transmit learning or setup (or

YAMAHA preset) button signals of this remote control to a

macro button. If necessary, set up the manufacturer code or

program a function with the remote control for your

component.

• This remote control handles button signals that operate

continuously, such as volume control, as short time interval

codes. Macro programming that include these types of macro

steps are therefore not recommended.

1 Press MACRO by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 2

and 3, the macro programming process is canceled. If this

happens, start over from step 1.

2 Press a macro button for which you want to

program the macro operation.

The button you chose for programming the macro

operation and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

Note

• “AGAIN” appears in the display window when a button other

than the macro buttons is pressed.

• If you want to change the source component, use SOURCE

SELECT k / n or input selector buttons. When you use the

input selector buttons, selecting the input is programmed as a

macro step, whereas SOURCE SELECT k / n only changes

the component.

3 Press the buttons of the functions that you

want to include in the macro operation

sequence in order.

• You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10

steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically

exits from the macro mode.

MCR 1 : DVD input

MCR 2 : DVD a

MCR 3 : DVD p

indicate the

number of macro

steps you entered

appear alternately so that you

can set up the next step

Note

• “NG” appears in the display window when programming has

not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 2.

0109V1000_54-62_EN 8/29/0, 1:27 PM58

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

RE-NAME

MACRO

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

RE-NAME

LEARN

MACRO

4 Press MACRO again when

the operation sequence

you want to program is

complete.

Note

• “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following

circumstances:

– when pressing more than one button at once; or

– when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position.

Memory back-up

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

Changing the Source Name in the

Display Window

1 Press an input selector button, A or B to

select the source component you want to

rename.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

2 Press RE-NAME by using

a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

3 Press k / n to select and enter a character.

Pressing n changes the character in the following

order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, - (hyphen).

(Pressing k goes in the reverse order.)

4 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next

position.

• If you continuously want to rename another source component,

press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4.

5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the

renaming mode.

Clearing a Learned Function or

Macro

1 Press an input selector button, A or B to

select the source component for which you

want to clear the function.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

2 Press LEARN if you want to clear a learned

function, or press MACRO to clear a

programmed macro by using a ballpoint pen

or similar object.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during step 3,

the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from

step 2.

0109V1000_54-62_EN 8/29/0, 1:27 PM59

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

CLEAR

LEARN

MACRO

CLEAR

3 Press and hold CLEAR by using a ballpoint

pen or similar object, and at the same time

press the button for which you want to clear

the learned function or macro for about

3 seconds.

“C:OK” appears in the display window.

• You can clear other learned functions and macros at this time

by holding down CLEAR again and pressing the other buttons

for which those learned functions or macros have been

programmed.

Note

• “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is

unsuccessful. In this case, try step 3 again.

4 Press LEARN or MACRO again to exit from

the clearing mode.

Once you have cleared a learned function or macro

for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting.

Clearing Learned Functions,

Macros, Renamed Source Names,

and Setup Manufacturer Codes

1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 2

and 3, the clearing process is canceled. If this happen, start

over from step 1.

2 Press k / n to select the clear mode.

The mode is shown in the display window in the

following order:

(L: name of a component) Clears

all learned functions for the

component area. Press the input

selector button, A or B to select

the component.

Clears all learned functions for

this unit control area.

Clears all learned functions.

Clears all programmed macros.

Clears all renamed source

names in the display window.

Clears all programmed functions

including setup manufacturer

codes. This returns to the

factory settings.

3 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

“C:OK” appears in the display window.

Note

• “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.

4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode.

Once you have cleared a learned function or macro

for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting.

Note

• “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following

circumstances:

– when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER;

– when pressing more than one button at once; or

– when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET

MENU is switched to another position.

0109V1000_54-62_EN 8/29/0, 1:27 PM60

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

OUT IN OUT IN

REMOTE

CONTROL OUT

REMOTE CONTROL OUT REMOTE CONTROL IN

ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT

ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT

ZONE 2

You can make up a multi-room audio-video system with this unit. This feature enables you to set this unit to reproduce

separate input sources in the main room and second room (Zone 2) with the supplied remote control in the second room.

Only analog signals are sent to the second room. For any source you want to listen to in the second room, you must

connect the analog output jack from the source to the corresponding analog input jack on this unit.

Zone 2 Connections

To use the multi-room functions of this unit, you need the following additional equipment:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second room

• An infrared emitter in the main room

This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second room to the main room

(for example, to a CD player or LD player).

• An amplifier and speakers for the second room

• A video monitor for the second room

• Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a

multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with

the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the

Zone 2 connections which will best meet your requirements.

• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the

REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these

products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6

YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.

This unit

■ Example of a system configuration and connections

Main room

DVD player

(or other component)

This unit

Infrared emitter

Second room

Amplifier

Video

monitor

Remote control

(in the Zone 2 mode)

Infrared signal receiver

0109V1000_54-62_EN 8/29/0, 1:27 PM61

ZONE 2

SOURCE

SELECT

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

CHP/INDEX

––

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

6CH INPUT

SOURCE

SELECT

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

–

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

+–

SOURCE

SELECT

LEARN

■ Special considerations when

using DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Therefore, if you

attempt to send the DTS signal to the second room, you

will only be able to hear the digital noise sound that could

damage your speakers.

Due to this characteristic of DTS encoded discs, the

following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For LDs or DVDs encoded with DTS

Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be sent to the

second room, as follows:

• LDs

Set your LD player’s left and right outputs to the

analog soundtrack.

• DVDs

Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-

channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or

Dolby Digital soundtrack.

For CDs encoded with DTS

DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature for CDs encoded with

DTS.

Remote Control in Zone 2

In the second room (Zone 2), the supplied remote control

can be used for the Zone 2 remote control. You can select

the input source and control the component which is

located in the main room directly from the second room

regardless of the listening condition in the main room.

Before starting the following procedure, set REC OUT/

ZONE 2 on the front panel to SOURCE/REMOTE.

1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in

“Setting the Manufacturer Code” on page 54.

2 Press l / h to select “L:AMP”.

3 Press k / n to select “Zone2”.

4 Press LEARN to complete the Zone 2 setup.

5 Press SOURCE SELECT k to display

“Zone2” in the display window.

6 Press an input selector button to select the

input source you want to listen to in the

second room.

The display window shows “2: name of selected

input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode.

7 You can control the component by using the

component control area buttons.

Note

• Adjust the Zone 2 volume with the control on the amplifier in

the second room.

8 Press SOURCE SELECT k / n to exit from

the Zone 2 mode.

0109V1000_54-62_EN 8/29/0, 1:28 PM62

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor (DSP). This processor allows you to

electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a

theater-like experience in your listening room. You can create outstanding audio sound field by selecting a suitable DSP

program (this will, of course, depend on what you are listening to) and making desired adjustments.

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.

Note

• Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below.

Hi-Fi DSP Programs

■ For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 7

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

No. Program (group) Sub-program Features

1 CONCERT HALL 1 —

2 CONCERT HALL 2 — A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections

from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great

deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage.

3 CHURCH —

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high

dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while

the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs.

4 JAZZ CLUB — This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York

jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field

offering a real and vibrant sound.

5 ROCK CONCERT — The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was

recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left

of the hall.

6 STADIUM — This program gives you the long delays and extraordinarily spacious feel of an

outdoor stadium in Los Angeles that is no less than 300 meters (990 feet) in

diameter.

7 ENTERTAINMENT Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a

big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a

high-energy, “immediate” sound.

6ch Stereo

Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field

suitable for background music at parties.

Note

• If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, no sound is output from the center speaker.

This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500 seats.

Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection

from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully.

0110V1000_63-67_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM63

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

No.

MOVIE

THEATER 1

Analog,

PCM, Dolby

Digital in

2-channel

DGTL Spectacle *

Spectacle 6.1 *

DTS Spectacle *

Spectacle ES *

This program creates the extremely wide sound

field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely

reproduces the source sound in detail, making

both the video and the sound field incredibly real.

This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded

with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS

(especially large-scale movie productions).

Sci-Fi 70 mm Sci-Fi

Analog,

PCM, Dolby

Digital in

2-channel

DGTL Sci-Fi *

Sci-Fi 6.1 *

DTS Sci-Fi *

Sci-Fi ES *

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound

effects in the latest sound form of science fiction

films, thus creating a broad and expansive

cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy

science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field

that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and

DTS-encoded software employing the most

advanced techniques.

Program

(group)

Sub-program

Input source

Features

Spectacle 70 mm Spectacle

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

CINEMA DSP Programs

■ For audio-video sources: Nos. 7 to 9

■ For movie programs: Nos. 10 to 12

No. Program (group) Sub-program Features

7 ENTERTAINMENT Game

9 MONO MOVIE — This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old

movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound

depth by using only the presence sound field.

8 TV SPORTS —

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field

employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you

can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music

programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the

commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the

atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the

rear is properly restrained.

0110V1000_63-67_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM64

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

11 MOVIE

THEATER 2

Analog,

PCM, Dolby

Digital in

2-channel

DGTL Adventure *

Adventure 6.1 *

DTS Adventure *

Adventure ES *

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing

the sound design of the newest 70-mm and

multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is

made to be similar to that of the newest movie

theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field

itself are restrained as much as possible.

General 70 mm General Analog,

PCM, Dolby

Digital in

2-channel

DGTL General *

General 6.1 *

DTS General *

General ES *

This program is for reproducing sounds from

70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is

characterized by a soft and extensive sound field.

The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It

spatially spreads all around and toward the

screen, restraining the echo effect of

conversations without losing clarity. For the

surround sound field, the harmony of music or

chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the

rear of the sound field.

Adventure 70 mm Adventure

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

No.

Sub-program

Input source

Features

Program

(group)

0110V1000_63-67_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM65

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

No.

q/DTS

SURROUND

Normal/

Matrix

6.1/ES

Analog, PCM,

Dolby Digital

in 2-channel

*1 The Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder is off.

*2 The Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder is on. The “ c ” indicator lights up on the front panel display.

• If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically

switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.

• If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when “12 6.1/ES AUTO” on the SET MENU is set to ON, the

Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder will automatically turn on and the corresponding DSP program will be selected.

• 6.1/ES on the remote control can be used to turn the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder on or off during Dolby Digital 5.1-

channel source or DTS 5.1-channel source playback.

Notes

• The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “Normal” of the q/DTS SURROUND program.

• If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, no sound is output from the center speaker.

• The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 7 (Game)

and 8 to 11.

Program

(group)

12 PRO LOGIC/Normal

DOLBY DIGITAL/

Normal *

DOLBY DIGITAL/

Matrix 6.1 *

DTS DIGITAL SUR./

Normal *

DTS DIGITAL SUR./

ES *

The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds

and sound effects from sources.

The highly efficient decoding process improves

crosstalk and channel separation, and makes

sound positioning smoother and more precise.

In this program, the digital sound field processor

is not turned on.

Enhanced PRO LOGIC/Enhanced

Analog,

PCM, Dolby

Digital in

2-channel

DOLBY DIGITAL/

Enhanced *

DOLBY DIGITAL/

Enhanced 6.1 *

DTS DIGITAL SUR./

Enhanced *

DTS DIGITAL SUR./

Enhanced ES *

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround

speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters.

Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital

decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field

processing create precise effects without altering

the original sound orientation.

The surround effects produced by this sound field

wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to

the left and right, and toward the screen.

Sub-program

Input source

Features

Dolby Digital

DTS

Dolby Digital

DTS

0110V1000_63-67_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM66

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

MOVIE THEATER Programs

Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround

matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder.

The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to

be lost in the encoding and decoding processes.

The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without

using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70-mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound

localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality

sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a

dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or

DTS technology.

■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect

These programs express an immense sound field and a

large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound

from the main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a

Dolby Stereo theater.

■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect

These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing

on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,

left surround and right surround channels. This processing

enables the this unit to reproduce the immense sound field

and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTS-

equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear

separation of all channels.

■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES + DSP sound field effect

These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra rear center

DSP sound field created from the rear center channel is added.

Presence DSP

sound field

Surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

Left surround DSP

sound field

Right surround DSP

sound field

0110V1000_63-67_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM67

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

What is a sound field?

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections

enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound

coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument,

there are two distinct types of sound reflections that

combine to make up the sound field:

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly

(50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting

from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or

a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as

shown in the diagram on page 70 for any particular

environment, and provide vital information to our ears.

Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen

the clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberation taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of

a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at

all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly

what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field

processor.

Sound Field Program Parameters

DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine

the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from

you to the performer, etc. In each program, these

parameters are set with values precisely calculated by

YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program.

It is recommended to use DSP programs without

changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also

allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with

one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those

parameters.

Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you

to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment

to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters

correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that

create the sound field you experience in an actual concert

hall or other listening environment. The size of the room,

for example, affects the length of time between the early

reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in

many of the DSP programs alters the timing between

these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room”

you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of

the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a

significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb

sound, for example, cause the reflections and

reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly

reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a

longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters

allow you to control these and many other factors that

contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to

essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc.

provided to create custom-tailored listening environments

that ideally match your mood and music.

See “Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions” on

pages 70 to 73.

0111V1000_68-73_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM68

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

Changing Parameter Settings

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set

parameters. Although you do not have to change the

initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to

better suit the input source or your listening room.

Adjustments should be made with the remote control.

• We recommended that you edit the parameter while using a

video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to

see the front panel display.

1 Set PARAMETER/SET

MENU to PARAMETER.

2 Turn on the video monitor

and press ON SCREEN

repeatedly to select the

full display mode.

Program No.

Program name (group)

Cursor

Parameters

Example of ROCK CONCERT

4 Press k / n to select the

parameter.

5 Press –/+ to change the

parameter value.

• When you set the parameter to a value other than the factory-

set value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name

on the video monitor.

6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to

change other program parameters.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the parameter value you edited will

return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter

value again.

Resetting a Parameter to the

Factory-set Value

■ To reset some of the parameters

to the factory-set values

Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and

hold – or + until the value temporarily stops at the

factory-set value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter

name disappears on the video monitor.

■ To reset all of the parameters to

the factory-set values

Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of

the parameter values of all DSP programs within the

selected group to the factory-set values (see page 42).

This operation resets all of the parameter values of all

DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values.

Notes

• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one

OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,

press k / n.

• You cannot change parameter values when “15 MEMORY

GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to

change the parameter values, set “15 MEMORY GUARD” to

OFF (see page 44).

PARAMETER

SET MENU

ON SCREEN

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

CHP/INDEX

–– –

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

P05 ROCK CONCERT

INIT.DLY

15ms

REV.TIME

LIVENESS

REV.DELAY

REV.LEVEL

100ms

1.6s

3 Select a DSP program you want to adjust.

HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

10KEY DSP

0111V1000_68-73_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM69

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room.

Note

• Not all of the following parameters can be found in every program.

■ INIT.DLY (initial delay)

(P.INIT.DLY — for the presence sound field)

Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the sound source by adjusting the delay between the

direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Control range: 1 – 99 msec

Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther

the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, for a large

room, set it to a large value.

INT. DLY INT. DLY INT. DLY

Level

Time

Level

Sound source

First reflection

Early

reflections

Time

Level

Time

Sound source

Reflection surface

Small value = 1 ms

Large value = 99 ms

■ ROOM SIZE

(P.ROOM SIZE — for the presence sound field)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the

surround sound field becomes.

Control range: 0.1 – 2.0

Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from

one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.

Level

Time

Level

Time

Sound source

Early reflections

Time

Level

Sound source

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

0111V1000_68-73_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM70

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

■ LIVENESS

Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the

early reflections decay.

Control range: 0 – 10

Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall

surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces

is referred to as “dead,” while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live.” The

“LIVENESS” parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the

room.

Level

Time

Dead

Level

Sound source

Time

Level

Time

Live

Sound source

Small reflected sound

Small value = 0

Large reflected sound

Large value = 10

■ S.DELAY (surround delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround sound

field.

Control range: 0 – 49 msec (The range depends on the signal format.)

■ S.INIT.DLY (surround initial delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side

of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear

channels are used.

Control range: 1 – 49 msec

■ S.ROOM SIZE (surround room size)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.

Control range: 0.1 – 2.0

■ S.LIVENESS (surround liveness)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the sound field.

Control range: 0 – 10

0111V1000_68-73_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM71

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

60 dB

REV. TIME REV. TIME REV. TIME

60 dB 60 dB

Level

Time

Reverberations

Level

Time

Sound source

Early reflections

Reverberations

Level

Time

Reverberations

Short reverberations

Sound source

Long reverberations

Small value = 1.0 s

Large value = 5.0 s

■ RC.INIT.DLY (rear center initial delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center

sound field.

Control range: 1 – 49 msec

■ RC.ROOM.SIZE (rear center room size)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field.

Control range: 0.1 – 2.0

■ RC.LIVENESS (rear center liveness)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field.

Control range: 0 – 10

■ REV.TIME (reverberation time)

Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to

decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an

extremely wide range.

Control range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec

Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments and a shorter

time for “live” sources and listening room environments.

0111V1000_68-73_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM72

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC OPERA-

TION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

REV. LEVEL

60 dB

(dB)

REV.

DELAY

REV TIME

Level

Time

■ REV.DELAY (reverberation delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning

of the reverberation sound.

Control range: 0 – 250 msec

Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you

feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Sound

source

Reverberation

Time

■ REV.LEVEL (reverberation level)

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

Control range: 0 – 100%

Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Sound source

■ CT.DELAY (center delay)

■ LS.DELAY (left surround delay)

■ RC.DELAY (rear center delay)

■ RS.DELAY (right surround delay)

Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 6 channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 – 50 msec

0111V1000_68-73_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM73

TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed

below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and

contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The unit fails to turn on

when STANDBY/ON (or

SYSTEM POWER) is

pressed, or enters in the

standby mode soon

after the power has

been turned on.

The power cord is not connected or the plug

is not completely inserted.

Firmly connect the power cord.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

on the rear panel is not fully set to the

left or right position.

Set the switch fully to the left or right

position when the unit is in the standby

mode.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on

this unit and on all speakers are secure and

that the wire for each connection does not

touch anything other than its respective

connection.

No sound and/or no

picture.

Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

An appropriate input source has not

been selected.

Select an appropriate input source with

INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input

selector buttons).

The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The main speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A

and/or B.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this

unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

Digital signals other than PCM audio,

Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this

unit cannot reproduce are being input to

this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc.

Play a source whose signals this unit can

reproduce.

No picture. There is no S-video connection between this

unit and the video monitor, although

S-video signals are being input to this unit.

Connect the monitor’s S-video input jack to

this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack.

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuit has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

switch is set to the appropriate position and

then turn the unit back on.

The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source

again.

Only the speaker on one

side can be heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE”

on the SET MENU.

Adjust it to the appropriate position.

16, 17

12 – 15

16, 17

—

14, 15

16, 17

12 – 17

APPENDIX

Check the speaker wires are not touching

each other and then turn the unit back on.

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this

unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

0112V1000_74-79_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM74

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

No sound from the

effect speakers.

The sound effect is off.

Press EFFECT to turn it on.

A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or

DTS decoding DSP program is being

used with material not encoded with

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS.

Select another DSP program.

A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is

being input to this unit.

No sound from the

center speaker.

The output level of the center speaker is set

to minimum.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

“1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU

is set to NONE.

Select the appropriate mode for your center

speaker.

One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 7)

has been selected.

Select another DSP program.

The source encoded with a Dolby

Digital or DTS signal does not have a

center channel signal.

No sound from the rear

speakers.

The output level of the rear speakers is set

to minimum.

Raise the output level of the rear speakers.

A monaural source is being played with

the program 12.

No sound from the

subwoofer.

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU

is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or

DTS signal is being played.

Select SWFR or BOTH.

“1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET

MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a

2-channel source is being played.

Poor bass reproduction. “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU

is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system

does not include a subwoofer.

No sound from the rear

center speaker.

“1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is

set to NONE.

Select LRG or SML.

Incorrect cable connections.

The volume level is low

while playing a record.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

The turntable should be connected to the unit

through an MC-head amplifier.

The output mode for each speaker (main,

center or rear) on the SET MENU does not

match your speaker configuration.

Select MAIN.

Select the appropriate output mode for each

speaker based on the size of the speakers in

your configuration.

Select BOTH.

The source does not contain low bass

signals (90 Hz and below).

63 – 66

—

63 – 66

—

37 – 39

12 – 15

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the

problem persists, the cables may be

defective.

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cord of your

turntable to the GND terminal of this unit.

12, 13

A “humming” sound can

be heard.

Select another DSP program.

0112V1000_74-79_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM75

TROUBLESHOOTING

The sound effect cannot

be recorded.

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The volume level cannot

be increased, or the

sound is distorted.

The component connected to the REC OUT

jacks of this unit is turned off.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

by a recording component.

Turn on the power to the component.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of

this unit.

This unit does not

operate properly.

A source component is only connected to

the analog input jacks of this unit.

Connect the source component to the digital

input jacks of this unit.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be changed.

“15 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET

MENU is set to ON.

Select OFF.

The internal microcomputer has been frozen

by an external electric shock (such as

lightning or excessive static electricity) or

by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power cord from the

outlet and then plug it in again after about

30 seconds.

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears on the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected

correctly.

The sound is degraded

when listening with

headphones connected

to a tape deck or CD

player that is connected

to this unit.

This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit.

There is noise

interference from digital

or high-frequency

equipment, or the unit.

The unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Move the unit further away from such

equipment.

12 – 15

—

16, 17

—

0112V1000_74-79_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM76

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Tuner

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

FM stereo reception

is noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts

may cause this problem when the

transmitter is too far away or the antenna

input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion,

and clear reception

cannot be obtained

even with a good FM

antenna.

There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in

with the automatic

tuning method.

The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method.

Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Previously preset

stations can no

longer be tuned in.

The unit has been disconnected for a long

period.

Re-store the stations.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in

with the automatic

tuning method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for best reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Noises result from lightning, fluorescent

lamps, motors, thermostats and other

electrical equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

There are buzzing

and whining noises

(especially in the

evening).

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.

30, 31

—

0112V1000_74-79_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM77

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The remote control does

not work nor function

properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no

more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front

panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition the unit.

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones and press

RESET.

The internal microcomputer has

“frozen”.

Press RESET on the remote control.

The remote control does

not “learn” new

functions. (The

TRANSMIT indicator

does not light up nor

flash.)

The batteries of this remote control and/or

the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries (and press RESET on

the remote control).

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper

distance.

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Learning is not possible.

Memory capacity is full. Further learning is not possible without

deleting unnecessary functions.

The internal microcomputer has

“frozen”.

Press RESET on the remote control.

Continuous functions

such as volume

adjustment are learned,

but operate only for a

moment before

stopping.

The learning process is incomplete. Be sure to press and hold the function button

on the other remote control until

TRANSMIT begins flashing slowly.

—

56, 59, 60

After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if

you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode,

disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating.

0112V1000_74-79_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM78

EnglishINTRODUCTION PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERAIONT

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

APPENDIX

SPECIFICATIONS

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms ............................... 100 W

1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms ................................................ 105 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[China and general models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms ................................................... 140 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 ohms .................................................. 125/160/195/230 W

[U.S.A. model] 135/170/205/245 W

• Damping Factor

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms .............................................. 80 or more

• Frequency Response

CD to Main L/R...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 ohms, Main L/R ..........................0.04%

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO MM to REC OUT (5 mV, shorted)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and general models].................... 86 dB

[Australia and Singapore models] ..................................... 81 dB

CD (200 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off ................... 98 dB

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

CD (5.1 kohms terminated) to Main L/R .................. 60 dB/45 dB

• Tone Control (Main L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz

BASS EXTENSION ................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz

• Phones Output ..................................................... 150 mV/100 ohms

• Input Sensitivity

CD, etc.............................................................. 150 mV/47 kohms

PHONO ............................................................. 2.5 mV/47 kohms

6CH INPUT.............................................. 150 mV/40 – 47 kohms

• Output Level

REC OUT ........................................................ 150 mV/0.9 kohms

PRE OUT ............................................................ 2.6 V/1.2 kohms

SUBWOOFER .................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL

• Composite Video Signal Level ................................ 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

• S-Video Signal Level

Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

C .................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms

• Component Video Signal Level

Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms

, P

....................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 ohms

• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component ................................................. DC to 25 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Others].........................................................87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)

Mono/Stereo ......................... 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf)/25 µV (39.2 dBf)

• Selectivity (400 kHz)............................................................... 70 dB

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB

• Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ...............................AC 120 V/60 Hz

[Australia model].................................................AC 240 V/50 Hz

[Singapore model] ............................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz

[China model]......................................................AC 220 V/50 Hz

[General model]......................... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60Hz

• Power Consumption .....................................approx. 320 W/360 VA

Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 1.5 W

• AC Outlets (Total 100 W/1A maximum) ................2 (SWITCHED)

[Australia model]..................................................1 (SWITCHED)

• Dimension (W x H x D)

............................ 435 x 171 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17”)

• Weight .........................................................................15 kg (33 lbs)

• Accessories .............................................................. Remote Control

.......................................................................................Batteries

........................................................................ AM loop antenna

...................................................................... Indoor FM antenna

................................................................. Quick Reference Card

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

0112V1000_74-79_EN 8/29/0, 1:36 PM79

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia ID

V641380

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

RX-V1000

Natural Sound AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

U C A

RX-V1000

0100V1000(UCA)-cv1/4 8/29/0, 4:31 PM1

ON SCREEN

LEVEL

SLEEP TEST

PARAMETER

SET MENU

TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR

MACRO

MACROLEARN

OFF ON

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Quick Reference Card

■ Remote Control

Programming

section

TRANSMIT

indicator

A and B buttons

STANDBY

SYSTEM POWER

Display window

SOURCE

SELECT k/n

10KEY/DSP

6.1/ES

A/B/C/D/E

Others

PRESET +/–

LEVEL

ON SCREEN

SLEEP

TEST

RE-NAME

CLEAR

LEARN

MACRO

MACRO ON/

OFF

Input selector

buttons

6CH INPUT

Operation

section

DSP program

group/Numeric

buttons

MUTE

VOLUME +/–

EFFECT

PARAMETER/

SET MENU

Cursor buttons

k/n/–/+

Setup section

■ TUNER

POWER

Preset group A

Preset group B

Preset group

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET +/–

Preset number

1 to 8

Preset group E

Preset group D

Preset group C

■ CD

DISPLAY

POWER

INDEX

Skip search

PLAY

PAUSE

(YAMAHA: Pause/Stop)

STOP

Numeric buttons

1 to 9

Clear

Numeric button +10

Numeric button 0

DISC +/– (disc skip)

■ MD

DISPLAY

POWER

Rec/Pause

Skip search

PLAY

PAUSE

STOP

Numeric buttons

1 to 9

Numeric button

+10

Numeric button 0

■ CD-R

DISPLAY

POWER

STOP

INDEX

Numeric

button 0

Skip search

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric buttons

1 to 9

Clear

Numeric button +10

V647510

Q-Ref(V1000)-8/24 8/30/0, 1:26 PM1

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

SYSTEM

POWER

STANDBY

PHONO

V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD

D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD

6CH INPUT

TITLE

ENTER

SOUND

DISPLAY

SOURCE

SELECT

SEARCH CHAPTER

10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT STADIUM

SPORTS

ENTER-

TAINMENT

POWER REC STOP PAUSE PLAY

6.1/ES

MONO

MOVIE

THEATER 2

MOVIE

THEATER 1

/DTS

SUR.

0 +10 +100

1234

5678

9101112

++ +

TV VOL

A / B / C / D / E

PRESET

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

DISC

MUTE

EFFECT

VOLUME

+–

CHP/INDEX

–– –

Quick Reference Card

■ LD (A)

DISPLAY

POWER

STOP

Chapter/Time

Numeric button 0

SOUND

CHAPTER –/+

(chapter search)

PLAY

PAUSE

Numeric buttons

1 to 9

Clear

Numeric button

+10

■ DVD

TITLE

DISPLAY

POWER

Return

Title/Index

Numeric button 0

Menu cursor/

ENTER

Audio

Skip search

PLAY

PAUSE

STOP

Numeric buttons

1 to 9

Clear

Numeric button

+10

DISC +/–

(disc skip)

■ VCR

Rewind/Fast

forward

POWER

REC

(Press twice to start

recording)

TV/Video input

PLAY

PAUSE

STOP

Numeric buttons

1 to 9

Numeric button

10 or 0

CH +/– (channel)

■ TV (TV/LD)

DISPLAY

POWER

Enter

TV INPUT

TV VOL +/–

TV MUTE

Numeric buttons

1 to 9

Numeric button

10 or 0

CH +/– (channel)

■ CBL/SAT (CBSAT)

DISPLAY

POWER

Enter

Menu cursor/

Menu select

Numeric buttons

1 to 9

Recall

Numeric button 0

CH +/– (channel)

• TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the

manufacturer code for your TV in the D-TV/LD or PHONO area.

• Commandes TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT et TV MUTE si l’on a programmé le code

fabricant du téléviseur dans la section D-TV/LD ou PHONO.

• TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT- und TV MUTE-Funktion, falls Sie den Herstellercode

für Ihr Fernsehgerät im Bereich D-TV/LD oder PHONO eingestellt haben.

• Knapparna TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT och TV MUTE fungerar om du ställt in

tillverkarkoden för din TV i D-TV/LD-området eller PHONO-området.

• TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT e TV MUTE sono operativi se nell’area D-TV/LD o

PHONO è stato impostato il codice del fabbricante del televisore di cui si

dispone.

• Funciones TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT y TV MUTE si ha ajustado el código de

fabricante para su televisor en el área D-TV/LD o PHONO.

• TV VOL +/– (tv-volumeniveau), TV INPUT (tv-ingangsbron) en TV MUTE (tv-

dempingsfunctie) als u de fabrikantcode voor uw tv hebt ingesteld in het D-TV/

LD- of PHONO-bedieningsgedeelte.

•

• You can control your VCR if you have set up the code for VCR 1.

• Permet de commander le magnétoscope si l’on a programmé le code fabricant

pour VCR 1.

• Sie können Ihren Videorecorder bedienen, falls Sie den Code für VCR 1

eingestellt haben.

• Du kan styra din videobandspelare om du ställt in koden för VCR 1.

• Se è stato impostato il codice di VCR 1 è possibile comandare il

videoregistratore di cui si dispone.

• Puede controlar su videorreproductor si ha ajustado el código para VCR 1.

• U kunt uw videorecorder bedienen als u de fabrikantcode voor VCR 1 hebt

ingesteld.

•

V647510

Q-Ref(V1000)-8/24 8/30/0, 1:26 PM2

Documenttranscriptie

UCA RX-V1000 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100V1000(UCA)-cv1/4 1 RX-V1000 Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI Printed in Malaysia ID V641380 8/29/0, 4:31 PM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 7 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • 8 9 Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated. 2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. 3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. 4 Follow Instructions – All operating and other instructions should be followed. 5 Water and Moisture – The unit should not be used near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc. 6 Carts and Stands – The unit should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6A A unit and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the unit and cart combination to overturn. 10 11 12 13 14 1 15 16 17 18 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Ventilation – The unit should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the unit should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface, that may block the ventilation openings; or placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings. Heat – The unit should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, stoves, or other appliances that produce heat. Power Sources – The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the unit. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the unit. Cleaning – The unit should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer. Nonuse Periods – The power cord of the unit should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. Object and Liquid Entry – Care should be taken so that objects do not fall into and liquids are not spilled into the inside of the unit. Damage Requiring Service – The unit should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the unit; or C. The unit has been exposed to rain; or D. The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or E. The unit has been dropped, or the cabinet damaged. Servicing – The user should not attempt to service the unit beyond those means described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. Power Lines – An outdoor antenna should be located away from power lines. Grounding or Polarization – Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization is not defeated. I CAUTION II 0101V1000_Cau_EN 2 8/29/0, 1:32 PM SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 19 For US customers only: Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna is connected to this unit, be sure the antenna system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE 1. 3. APPENDIX We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. English YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. CAUTION II III 0101V1000_Cau_EN 3 8/29/0, 1:32 PM ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ADVANCED OPERATION 2. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. BASIC OPERAIONT FCC INFORMATION (for US customers only) PREPARATION ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT Note to CATV system installer: INTRODUCTION ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE MAST CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 5 cm of ventilation space on the top, right and left, and at the back of this unit — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Buring objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover the rear panel of this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/ or liquid drops inside this unit. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and general models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and general models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating at the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. III CAUTION IV 0101V1000_Cau_EN 4 8/29/0, 1:32 PM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS CONTENTS ........................................................... 1 FEATURES ............................................................ 2 GETTING STARTED ........................................... 3 Checking the Package Contents ............................... 3 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control ............... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ........................ 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP .............................................. 11 Speakers to Be Used ............................................... 11 Speaker Placement ................................................. 11 Before Connecting Components ............................ 12 Connecting Audio Components ............................. 12 Connecting Video Components .............................. 14 Connecting the Speakers ........................................ 16 Connecting to an External Amplifier ..................... 18 Connecting an External Decoder ........................... 18 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch ....................... 19 Connecting the Power Supply Cords ..................... 19 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ......................... 20 SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS ......................... 21 Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F .................................................... 21 ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS ......................................... 22 Before You Begin ................................................... 22 Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) .......... 23 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS ...................................................... 45 SLEEP TIMER .................................................... 46 Setting the Sleep Timer .......................................... 46 Canceling the Sleep Timer ..................................... 46 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES .................. 47 Control Area ........................................................... 47 Each Component Control Area .............................. 49 Setting the Manufacturer Code .............................. 54 Programming a New Remote Control Function (Learn Feature) ................................................... 55 Using the Macro Feature ........................................ 57 Changing the Source Name in the Display Window ........................................... 59 Clearing a Learned Function or Macro .................. 59 Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes ................................. 60 ADVANCED OPERATION OSD Modes ............................................................ 20 Selecting the OSD Mode ........................................ 20 Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU ................. 36 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ........... 37 2 LOW FRQ TEST ............................................... 40 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) ........................................... 41 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ....... 41 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) ......... 41 6 INPUT RENAME .............................................. 41 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT ............................................ 41 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ................... 42 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) ............. 42 10 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) ................ 42 11 DTS LFE LEVEL ............................................. 43 12 6.1/ES AUTO .................................................... 43 13 SP DELAY TIME ............................................. 43 14 DISPLAY SET .................................................. 44 15 MEMORY GUARD ......................................... 44 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS ................................................. 12 SET MENU .......................................................... 36 PREPARATION Front Panel ............................................................... 4 Remote Control ........................................................ 6 Using the Remote Control ........................................ 8 Front Panel Display .................................................. 9 Rear Panel .............................................................. 10 INTRODUCTION ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION ZONE 2 ................................................................ 61 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Zone 2 Connections ................................................ 61 Remote Control in Zone 2 ...................................... 62 BASIC OPERATION BASIC PLAYBACK ........................................... 24 Input Modes and Indications .................................. 26 Selecting a Sound Field Program ........................... 28 Normal Stereo Reproduction .................................. 29 TUNING ............................................................... 30 BASIC RECORDING ......................................... 35 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............................. 63 Hi-Fi DSP Programs ............................................... 63 CINEMA DSP Programs ........................................ 64 MOVIE THEATER Programs ................................ 67 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ......................................................... 68 APPENDIX Connecting the Antennas ........................................ 30 Automatic (or Manual) Tuning .............................. 31 Presetting Stations .................................................. 32 Tuning in to a Preset Station .................................. 33 Exchanging Preset Stations .................................... 34 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION What is a sound field? ............................................ 68 Sound Field Program Parameters ........................... 68 Changing Parameter Settings ................................. 69 Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value ...... 69 Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions .......... 70 English APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................... 74 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 79 1 0102V1000_1-10_EN 1 8/29/0, 1:32 PM Thank you for selecting this YAMAHA AV receiver. FEATURES Built-in 5-Channel Power Amplifier Other Features ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz) Main: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω) Center: 100 W (8 Ω) Rear: 100 W + 100 W (8 Ω) ◆ Maximum Power (EIAJ) (10% THD, 1 kHz) [China and general models] Main: 140 W + 140 W (8 Ω) Center: 140 W (8 Ω) Rear: 140 W + 140 W (8 Ω) ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A Converter ◆ “SET MENU” which Provides You with 15 Items for Optimizing This Unit for Your Audio/Video System ◆ Test Tone Generator for Easier Speaker Balance Adjustment ◆ 6-Channel External Decoder Input for Other Future Formats ◆ BASS EXTENSION Button for Reinforcing Bass Response ◆ On Screen Display Function Helpful in Controlling This Unit ◆ S Video Signal Input/Output Capability ◆ Component Video Input/Output Capability ◆ Optical and Coaxial Digital Audio Signal Jacks ◆ Sleep Timer ◆ Multi-Function Remote Control ◆ Custom Installation Facility Multi-Mode Digital Sound Field Processing ◆ Digital Sound Field Processor (DSP) ◆ Dolby Pro Logic decoder ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 Decoder ◆ DTS/DTS ES Decoder ◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP Technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner ◆ 40-Station Random Access Preset Tuning ◆ Automatic Preset Tuning ◆ Preset Station Shifting Capability (Preset Editing) • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control for such operations, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “AC-3”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. © 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS”, “DTS Digital Surround” and “DTS ES” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 2 0102V1000_1-10_EN 2 8/29/0, 1:32 PM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the Package Contents Check your package to make sure it has the following items. Remote control Manganese batteries (3) (AA, R6, UM-3) AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China and general models) Quick Reference Card MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF ON SYSTEM POWER STANDBY PHONO TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PREPARATION V-AUX D-TV/LD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER MENU REC SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH STOP PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP HALL 2 1 2 3 4 STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX BASIC OPERAIONT 6.1/ES HALL 1 ROCK CONCERT A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT – (Australia and Singapore models) DISC RESET button If the remote control is without batteries for more than 3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. Note • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. English • Change the batteries periodically. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. After you have inserted new batteries, be sure to push RESET in the battery compartment by using a ballpoint pen or similar object before using the remote control. (This does not clear the contents of the memory.) APPENDIX ■ Notes on batteries As the batteries lose power, the operating range of the remote control decreases and the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. When you notice any of these conditions, change all of the batteries. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) inside the battery compartment. ■ Changing batteries 3 0102V1000_1-10_EN 3 ADVANCED OPERATION Installing Batteries in the Remote Control 8/29/0, 1:33 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 INPUT VOLUME 7 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D-TV/LD CD-R SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING TUNER EDIT PHONES CD ON VCR2 /DVR V-AUX OFF PRESET TUNING /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE EFFECT BASS MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R TREBLE OPTICAL PROGRAM PHONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 + – SILENT + – VIDEO AUX PRESET TUNING /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE 8 9 w q e r t 0 EDIT y u i MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO o pa s 1 STANDBY/ON 6 VOLUME Turns on and sets this unit in the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. Standby mode In this mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor d 7 6CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. The source selected by pressing 6CH INPUT takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons). 8 SPEAKERS A/B Receives signals from the remote control. Turn on or off the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. 3 Front panel display 9 BASS EXTENSION ON/OFF Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 9). When pushed in (ON), this feature boosts the bass frequency of the left and right main channels by +6 dB (60 Hz) while maintaining overall tonal balance. This boost is useful if you do not use a subwoofer. However, this boost may not be noticeable if “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL and “1E LFE/ BASS OUT” is set to SWFR. 4 INPUT MODE Selects the mode of input for sources that send two or more types of signals to this unit (see page 26). You cannot control the input mode when you select 6CH INPUT as the input source. 0 PROCESSOR DIRECT ON/OFF 5 INPUT l / h Selects the input source (DVD, D-TV/LD, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, VCR 2/DVR, V-AUX, PHONO, CD, TUNER, CD-R, MD/TAPE) you want to listen to or watch. When pushed in (ON), BASS, TREBLE, and BASS EXTENSION are bypassed, eliminating any alteration of the original signal. 4 0102V1000_1-10_EN 4 8/29/0, 1:33 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. To select the automatic tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. To select the manual tuning mode, press this button so that the “AUTO” indicator does not light up. w EFFECT s BASS Switches the effect speakers (center, rear and rear center (see page 17)) on and off. If you turn off the output of these speakers by using EFFECT, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are directed to the left and right main channels. When Dolby Digital or DTS signals are mixed, the left and right main channel signal levels may not match. Adjusts the low-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the low-frequency response. e A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E). r PROGRAM l / h d TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response for the left and right main channels. Turn the control to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the high-frequency response. Note Selects the DSP program (see page 28). Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) appears next to the band indication on the front panel display, and selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not appear. y PHONES jack When you are not operating the controls behind the front panel door, close the door. ADVANCED OPERATION Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers. ■ Opening and closing the front panel door u VIDEO AUX jacks Inputs audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. To direct this source to the VCR 1 output jacks, select V-AUX by using REC OUT/ZONE 2. D I G I T A L ADDITIONAL INFORMATION i PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h (the colon (:) turns on or off) between selecting a preset station number and tuning. This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. BASIC OPERAIONT t PRESET/TUNING l / h • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center, rear and rear center speakers may not match that of the left and right main speakers. PREPARATION a TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independent of the source you are listening to in the main room. When set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source is directed to all outputs. INTRODUCTION q REC OUT/ZONE 2 To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. o FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. APPENDIX p MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. English 5 0102V1000_1-10_EN 5 8/29/0, 1:33 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote Control This section describes the basic operation of this unit with the remote control. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on pages 47 to 60 for full details. 1 A 2 B 3 4 5 MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF e r t y ON u SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO 6CH INPUT i TITLE 6 ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY 7 C 8 SELECT POWER – CHAPTER + REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 6 7 10KEY DSP 5 MONO MOVIE 6.1/ES MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 11 12 0 +10 +100 o A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL D 8 /DTS SUR. 10 CHP/INDEX q l / 9 0 SOUND MENU SEARCH – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT p – DISC w a sd f g h A B C D E PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SET MENU SLEEP TEST Programming section Provides a selection of programming types you can utilize to conveniently operates your other components. A and B buttons See page 47. Operation section Provides functions such as play, stop, skip, etc. for operating your other components. Others Functions vary depending on your components that are set up with the manufacturer code. Setup section Sets speaker output levels, SET MENU, DSP parameters, etc. 6 0102V1000_1-10_EN 6 8/29/0, 1:33 PM j k E CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS y MACRO Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. Used to program a series of operations for control by a single button (see page 58). 2 TRANSMIT indicator u MACRO ON/OFF Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. Turns the macro function on and off. 3 STANDBY i 6CH INPUT Sets this unit in the standby mode. Selects the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. 4 SYSTEM POWER o MUTE Turns on the power of this unit. Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. Select the input source. p VOLUME +/– 6 Display window Increases or decreases the volume level. Shows the selected source component that you are controlling. a EFFECT 8 10KEY/DSP s Cover 7 SOURCE SELECT k/n Selects the numeric button (10KEY) mode or DSP mode. 9 DSP program group/Numeric buttons Select DSP programs or numbers according to the position of 10KEY/DSP. (Press a button repeatedly to select a DSP program within that group.) Turns on or off the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder with 10KEY/DSP set to the DSP position. q A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups. w PRESET +/– Selects a preset station number (1 to 8). Used for changing the input source name in the display window (see page 59). r CLEAR Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn and rename features, programmed macros, and set manufacturer codes (see pages 59 and 60). Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for programming the functions of other remote controls (see pages 54 to 56). Selects the effect speaker channels (center, rear, rear center (see page 17) and subwoofer) so you can adjust their output level independently. f ON SCREEN Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor. g SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. h TEST Outputs the test tone. j PARAMETER/SET MENU Selects the PARAMETER mode or SET MENU mode. k Cursor buttons k/n/–/+ Select and adjust DSP program parameters and SET MENU items according to the position of PARAMETER/ SET MENU. l RESET Press this button after you have changed the batteries or when the remote control stops working properly. (Pressing RESET does not clear the acquired functions.) APPENDIX t LEARN d LEVEL ADDITIONAL INFORMATION e RE-NAME Slides down to show the setup buttons. ADVANCED OPERATION 0 6.1/ES BASIC OPERAIONT Selects the source component without switching the input. Switches the effect speakers (center, rear and rear center (see page 17)) on and off. If the output of these speakers is turned off, all Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals except for the LFE channel are directed to the left and right main channels. PREPARATION 5 Input selector buttons INTRODUCTION 1 Infrared window English 7 0102V1000_1-10_EN 7 8/29/0, 1:33 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Using the Remote Control D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON – 30° 30° + – + Approximately 6 m (20 feet) MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF ON SYSTEM POWER STANDBY PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR CD DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER REC SOUND MENU – CHAPTER + SEARCH STOP PAUSE PLAY / 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 1 ROCK CONCERT MONO MOVIE CHURCH 2 3 STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT 5 6.1/ES 6 7 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 10 11 0 +10 CHP/INDEX JAZZ CLUB 4 TV SPORTS 8 /DTS SUR. 12 +100 A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT – DISC The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. 8 0102V1000_1-10_EN 8 8/29/0, 1:33 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front Panel Display 2 34 VIRTUAL 0 q PS PTY RT 8 9 CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms w e r t 1 t indicator Lights up when the built-in DTS decoder is on. DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO y u i 0 c indicator Lights up when the built-in Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder is on. Light up according to the type of Dolby signals this unit is reproducing. “ g ” lights up when the builtin Dolby Digital decoder is on. “ o ” lights up when the built-in Dolby Pro Logic decoder is on. w SP A/B indicator Lights up according to which set of main speakers is selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. 4 x indicator e Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. Lights up when you select a DSP program. 5 DSP program indicators 6 STEREO indicator Lights up when the unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. 7 AUTO indicator Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 8 VOLUME level indicator 9 Input source indicator t MEMORY indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored. y TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit tunes in to a station. u ZONE 2 indicator Lights up when you select the input source while the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode (see pages 61 and 62). APPENDIX Indicates the volume level. r Multi-information display Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2 or q/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 g and o indicators q v indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP (see page 29). BASIC OPERAIONT 2 VIRTUAL indicator D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX PREPARATION DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB 6 7 5 INTRODUCTION 1 i SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. Shows the current input source with the arrow-shaped cursor. English 9 0102V1000_1-10_EN 9 8/29/0, 1:33 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear Panel 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (General model) DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ TAPE AUDIO TUNER R AUDIO L R IN (PLAY) CD-R OPTICAL AM ANT OUT (REC) GND FM ANT Y D-TV /LD PB/ CB CBL /SAT PR/ CR UNBAL. CD-R OUT (REC) Y IN VCR 1 GND CD OUT PB/ CB IN PR/ CR D-TV /LD PHONO CD + VCR 2 /DVR RS232C CBL /SAT MAIN L R L MAIN IN MAIN OUT AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL B CENTER SURROUND + REAR SUB CENTER WOOFER – IMPEDANCE SELECTOR MONITOR OUT Y OUT SET BEFORE POWER ON CENTER + – – + MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 CENTER :6 :6 REAR L PB/ CB ZONE 2 OUT IN 0 PRE OUT/MAIN IN + MAIN R LD RF (AC-3) COAXIAL: SELECT BY SETMENU DIGITAL INPUT – SPEAKERS – A D-TV/LD DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL VOLTAGE SELECTOR R IN (PLAY) 75 VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT DVD DVD MD/TAPE CD CD-R S VIDEO L MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8 A + B:16 :8 :8 CENTER REAR MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER 100 kHz/10 kHz PR/ CR MONITOR OUT REAR (SURROUND) R REAR (SURROUND) L 50 kHz/ 9 kHz OUT CENTER REMOTE CONTROL qw SUB WOOFER 6CH INPUT FM AM FREQUENCY STEP S VIDEO VIDEO y e rt 1 DIGITAL INPUT jacks 0 q RF (AC-3) input jack (China and general 2 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks models only) See page 14. 3 Antenna input terminals See page 30 for connection information. 4 Audio component jacks See pages 12 and 13 for connection information. 5 Video component jacks u q REMOTE CONTROL IN/OUT jacks See page 61 for details. w RS-232C connector This is a control expansion connector for commercial use. Consult your dealer for details. See pages 14 and 15 for connection information. e 6CH INPUT jacks 6 Speaker terminals See pages 13 and 18 for connection information. See pages 16 and 17 for connection information. r ZONE 2 OUT jacks 7 PRE OUT/MAIN IN jacks See page 61 for details. See page 18 for connection information. t FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and 8 AC power cord Connect to a power outlet. general models only) See page 30. 9 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and general y IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch models only) See page 19. Use this switch to match the amplifier output to your speaker impedance. Set this unit in the standby mode before you change the setting of this switch (see page 19). u AC OUTLET(S) Use these outlets to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 19). 10 0102V1000_1-10_EN 10 8/29/0, 1:33 PM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speaker Placement Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. Main speaker (R) Subwoofer Rear speaker (R) Main speaker (L) 1.8 m Center speaker It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal is played back. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Place the left and right main speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (approx. 6 feet) above the floor. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under the monitor and centrally between the main speakers. Note • If the center speaker is not used, the center channel sound will be heard from the left and right main speakers. In this case, “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE (see page 38 for details). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field ■ Main speakers ADVANCED OPERATION The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use high-performance models that can reproduce sounds over the full range for the center speaker and the rear speakers. Rear speaker (L) Rear center speaker See page 17. BASIC OPERATION The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus the effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for the effect and surround sounds, and the center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. PREPARATION This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 5-speaker system, using left and right main speakers, left and right rear speakers and a center speaker. The 6-speaker system, which adds a rear center speaker to the 5 speaker configuration, is the latest advancement in surround sound technology. (See page 17 for using the rear center speaker.) If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. INTRODUCTION Speakers to Be Used ■ Subwoofer APPENDIX The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce the wall reflections. CAUTION 11 0103V1000_11-18_EN 11 8/29/0, 1:33 PM English Some types of speakers interfere with a video monitor. If this problem occurs, move the speakers away from the monitor. If you cannot avoid installing the center speaker or subwoofer near the video monitor, use a magnetically shielded speaker. CONNECTIONS Before Connecting Components CAUTION Never connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed. • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling system to all its products. • After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. Connecting Audio Components ■ Connecting to digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals (see page 25 for details). y • You can designate the input for each digital jack according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see page 41 for details). About the dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. ■ Connecting a turntable ■ Connecting a CD player y • The COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks are available for a CD player which has coaxial or optical digital output jacks. • When you connect a CD player to both the COAXIAL CD and OPTICAL CD jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL CD jack. ■ Connecting an MD recorder, tape deck or CD recorder y • Only digital signals input from a source such as a CD or DVD are output from the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. • When you connect your recording component to both the analog and digital input and output jacks, the priority is given to the digital signal. • You can connect an MD recorder to any digital input jack by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see page 41). Notes • When you connect a recording component to this unit, keep its power on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • When you record from a source component connected to this unit while this unit is set in the standby mode, the recorded sound may be distorted. To avoid this problem, turn on this unit. PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an inline boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. y • The GND terminal does not electrically ground the turntable. It simply reduces noise in the signal. In some cases, you may hear less noise if you do not connect to the GND terminal. 12 0103V1000_11-18_EN 12 8/29/0, 1:33 PM CONNECTIONS OPTICAL INPUT OPTICAL INPUT MD recorder or tape deck OUTPUT R L L OUTPUT R DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ TAPE R OUTPUT OUT (REC) UNBAL. CD-R OUT (REC) Y D-TV /LD PB/ CB PR/ CR D-TV/LD Y IN O VCR 1 DVD GND R VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT DVD DVD CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) FM ANT L S VIDEO L CD PB/ CB OUT D-TV /LD PHONO C COAXIAL OUTPUT CD RS232C CBL /SAT MAIN (General model) SURROUND GND OUTPUT PB/ CB ZONE 2 OUT 100 kHz/10 kHz PR/ CR MONITOR OUT 50 kHz/ 9 kHz OUT CENTER REMOTE CONTROL SUB WOOFER 6CH INPUT FM AM FREQUENCY STEP S VIDEO L R SUBWOOFER OUTPUT CENTER OUTPUT VIDEO R SURROUND OUTPUT L R MAIN OUTPUT External decoder See page 18. ADVANCED OPERATION L MONITOR OUT Y OUT IN LD RF (AC-3) COAXIAL: SELECT BY SETMENU DIGITAL INPUT PR/ CR IN VCR 2 /DVR BASIC OPERATION OPTICAL COAXIAL R MD/TAPE GND 75 L AUDIO L CD CD-R R PREPARATION OPTICAL AM ANT O CD player R IN (PLAY) CD-R OPTICAL OUTPUT AUDIO TUNER O INPUT L O INTRODUCTION INPUT OPTICAL OUTPUT CD recorder Turntable ADDITIONAL INFORMATION indicates signal direction L indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables APPENDIX English 13 0103V1000_11-18_EN 13 8/29/0, 1:33 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting Video Components ■ About the video jacks There are three types of video jacks. Video signals input through the VIDEO jacks are the conventional composite video signals. Video signals input through the S VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals. The S-video signals achieve high-quality color reproduction. Video signals input through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) video signals. The jacks are also separated into three for each signal. The description of the component video jacks may be different depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR/Y, PB, PR/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). Component video signals provide the best quality in picture reproduction. If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, you can connect it to this unit. Connect the S-video signal output jack on your video component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component signal output jacks on your video component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. y Y VIDEO jack (composite) PB/ CB PR/ CR S VIDEO jack COMPONENT VIDEO jacks • Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are output through the corresponding composite video, S-video, and component jacks, respectively. • If you make S-video connections to this unit, it is not necessary to make composite video connections. If both types of connections are made, this unit gives priority to the S-video signal. • You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks according to your component by using “7 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the SET MENU (see page 41 for details). Notes • Use a commercially available S-video cable when connecting to the S VIDEO jack, and commercially available video cables when connecting to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • When you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks, check the details in the owner’s manual that came with the component being connected. ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL These jacks are used to connect any video input source such as a game console to this unit. VIDEO AUX S V L R O OPTICAL OUT AUDIO OUT R AUDIO OUT L VIDEO OUT Game console S VIDEO OUT ■ About the q RF (AC-3) signal input jack (China and general models only) If your LD player has a Dolby Digital RF (AC-3) signal output jack, connect it to the q RF (AC-3) input jack on this unit. If the Dolby Digital RF (AC-3) and analog signals are input at the same time, priority is given to the RF signals. When you want to reproduce the Dolby Digital RF (AC-3) signals, set the input mode to D.D. RF by using INPUT MODE (see page 26). LD RF (AC-3) COAXIAL: SELECT BY SETMENU Notes • The Dolby Digital RF (AC-3) signals cannot be output by using the REC OUT selector. When you record sound or images from an LD player, be sure to connect the player to either the DIGITAL OPTICAL or analog audio jacks. • Even if you connect an LD player with the Dolby Digital RF (AC-3) output jack to this unit, you cannot reproduce Dolby Digital sound from all LD discs. You must playback an LD encoded with Dolby Digital signals in order to take advantage of the Dolby Digital sound. 14 0103V1000_11-18_EN 14 8/29/0, 1:33 PM CONNECTIONS Note INTRODUCTION (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Singapore models only) • If your LD player has a Dolby Digital RF signal output jack, connect it to this unit through an RF demodulator (separately purchased). RF OUTPUT LD player OPTICAL OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT OPTICAL OUTPUT COMPONENT OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT TV/digital TV or LD player V S VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO TUNER R AUDIO L R L CD-R R OPTICAL AM ANT OUT (REC) GND Y D-TV /LD PB/ CB CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) 75 FM ANT DVD UNBAL. CD-R OUT (REC) PR/ CR D-TV/LD Y IN VCR 1 DVD O GND CD PB/ CB OUT D-TV /LD O PHONO CD RS232C MAIN CBL /SAT SURROUND LD RF (AC-3) COAXIAL: SELECT BY SETMENU DIGITAL INPUT MONITOR OUT Y OUT PB / CB ZONE 2 OUT IN C PR/ CR IN VCR 2 /DVR ADVANCED OPERATION OPTICAL COAXIAL C (General model) MD/TAPE CD CD-R VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT DVD S VIDEO L IN (PLAY) V S BASIC OPERATION DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ TAPE S VIDEO OUTPUT R L DVD player PREPARATION S VIDEO OUTPUT COMPONENT OUTPUT 100 kHz/10 kHz PR/ CR MONITOR OUT 50 kHz/ 9 kHz OUT CENTER REMOTE CONTROL SUB WOOFER FM AM FREQUENCY STEP 6CH INPUT S VIDEO VIDEO L R S VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT V L R L R S S VIDEO OUTPUT Cable TV or satellite tuner V V S VIDEO INPUT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION S VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT VCR 1 or VCR 2/DVR (digital S VIDEO video recorder) OUTPUT APPENDIX COAXIAL OUTPUT AUDIO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables C indicates coaxial cables V indicates video cables S S V VIDEO INPUT Video monitor indicates S-video cables S VIDEO INPUT English L COMPONENT INPUT 15 0103V1000_11-18_EN 15 8/29/0, 1:33 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting the Speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other and do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage the unit and/or speakers. If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers. ■ Speaker cables A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One of the cables is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 2 1 Remove approx. 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 1 2 3 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. y (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China and general models only) • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals One or two speaker systems can be connected to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the MAIN A or B terminals. ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 16 0103V1000_11-18_EN 16 8/29/0, 1:33 PM CONNECTIONS ■ Using the rear center speaker You can enjoy the Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software by adding the rear center speaker to the 5speaker configuration. Connecting the rear center speaker 1 Connect the PRE OUT REAR CENTER jack on this unit to the input jack on the separately prepared power amplifier. 2 Connect the rear center speaker to the speaker terminals on this power amplifier. Setting up this unit for using the rear center speaker When you use a rear center speaker, “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU must be set to LRG or SML (see page 39). PREPARATION Note • Be sure to correctly connect the + terminal of the speaker to the + terminal on the power amplifier, and the – terminal of the speaker to the – terminal on the power amplifier. INTRODUCTION Rear center speaker placement Place the rear center speaker in the center between the left and right rear speakers at the same height from the floor as the rear speakers. Note Main speakers A BASIC OPERATION • No sound is output from the rear center speaker when “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE (see page 38 for details). Main speakers B Right Left Right Left ADVANCED OPERATION (General model) VOLTAGE SELECTOR + – SPEAKERS – PRE OUT/MAIN IN + R L R L A MAIN IN MAIN MAIN OUT AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL CENTER + ADDITIONAL INFORMATION B REAR SUB CENTER WOOFER – IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON CENTER R + – REAR (SURROUND) – + MAIN A OR B: 4 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 6 MIN. /SPEAKER L MAIN A OR B: 8 MIN. /SPEAKER A + B:16 MIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8 MIN. /SPEAKER R REAR (SURROUND) L APPENDIX Power amplifier Right Center speaker Subwoofer connection See “SUBWOOFER jack” on page 18. Left Rear speakers Rear center speaker Subwoofer system English 17 0103V1000_11-18_EN 17 8/29/0, 1:33 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting to an External Amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Note • When RCA pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, do not use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. PRE OUT/MAIN IN R L MAIN IN 1 MAIN OUT 2 5 5 SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack. (The cut-off frequency of this jack is 90 Hz.) The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed if they are assigned to this jack. Notes • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. The subwoofer volume cannot be adjusted from this unit. • Depending on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET”, “10A LFE LEVEL” and “11 DTS LFE LEVEL” on the SET MENU, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. SUB REAR CENTER WOOFER CENTER 3 Connecting an External Decoder 1 MAIN jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right MAIN, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. • MAIN IN jacks Line input to this unit’s main channel amplifiers. • MAIN OUT jack Main channel line output jacks. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. 4 R REAR (SURROUND) L Note Notes • The signals output through these jacks are affected by the BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION settings. 2 REAR CENTER jack Rear center channel line output jack. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, changing items 1A to 1F on the SET MENU is not affected. 3 CENTER jack Center channel line output jack. 4 REAR (SURROUND) jacks Rear channel line output jacks. 18 0103V1000_11-18_EN 18 8/29/0, 1:33 PM CONNECTIONS IMPEDANCE SELECTOR Switch INTRODUCTION WARNING Do not change the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch setting while the power of this unit is on, otherwise the unit may be damaged. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch to either position fully when this unit is in the standby mode. Select the left or right position according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. Switch position VOLTAGE SELECTOR Speaker SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL IN T Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher. [Canada model only] The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 CENTER :6 REAR :6 MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8 A + B:16 CENTER :8 REAR :8 MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER Right BASIC OPERATION Main If you use one set of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Left AC OUTLETS IN N Impedance level PREPARATION (General model) VOLTAGE SELECTOR ADVANCED OPERATION IMPEDANCE SELECTOR ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and general models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. After completing all connections, connect the AC power cord to an AC power outlet. Disconnect the AC power cord if you will not use this unit for a long period of time. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) (General model) VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCHED 100W MAX. TOTAL N T IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B: 8 A + B:16 :8 :8 CENTER REAR MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER MIN. /SPEAKER To AC outlet SWITCHED 0104V1000_19-23_EN 19 19 8/29/0, 1:33 PM English MAIN A OR B: 4 A + B: 8 CENTER :6 REAR :6 APPENDIX AC OUTLETS N U.S.A., Canada, Singapore, China and general models .............................................. 2 OUTLETS Australia model ............................................... 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is 100 W. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Connecting the Power Supply Cords ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) You can display the operation information for this unit on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and DSP program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. Selecting the OSD Mode 1 When you turn on the power, the video monitor and front panel display show the level of the main volume for a few seconds and then switch to show the current DSP program. 2 Press ON SCREEN on the remote control repeatedly to change the display mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short display, and display off. y • If a video source is being reproduced, the OSD is superimposed over the image. • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded with any video signal. • You can set the OSD to turn on (blue background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “14 DISPLAY SET” on the SET MENU (see page 44). PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL OSD Modes SET MENU SLEEP TEST You can change the amount of information the OSD shows. Full display This mode always shows the DSP program parameter settings on the video monitor (see page 69). Short display This mode briefly shows the same contents as the front panel display at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Display off This mode briefly shows the “DISPLAY OFF” message at the bottom of the screen and then disappears. Afterwards, no changes to operations appear on the monitor except those of the ON SCREEN button. P01 CONCERT HALL 1 INIT. DLY ROOM SIZE LIVENESS 30ms 1.0 5 P01 CONCERT HALL 1 Full display Short display y • When you choose the full display mode, INPUT l / h, VOLUME and some other types of operation information are displayed at the bottom of the screen in the same format as that for the front panel display. • The SET MENU and test tone display appear regardless of the OSD mode. Notes • If you choose a video input source that has a component connected to both the S VIDEO IN and composite VIDEO IN jacks, and both the S VIDEO OUT and composite VIDEO OUT jacks are connected to a video monitor, the video signal is output to both the S VIDEO OUT and VIDEO OUT jacks. However, the OSD is carried only on the S-video signal. If no video signal is input, the OSD is carried on both the S-video and composite video signals. • If your video monitor is connected only to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks of this unit, the OSD is not shown. Make sure to connect your video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and either VIDEO or S VIDEO jacks if you want to see the OSD. • Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images. 20 0104V1000_19-23_EN 20 8/29/0, 1:33 PM SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS Summary of SPEAKER SET Items 1A through 1F Description Initial setting 1A CENTER SP Selects the center channel output mode according to the size of the center speaker. The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE. LRG 1B MAIN SP Selects the main channel output mode according to the size of the main speakers. The possible settings are LARGE and SMALL. LARGE 1C REAR L/R SP Selects the rear channel output mode according to the size of the rear speakers. The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE. 1D REAR CT SP Selects the rear center channel output according to the size of the rear center speaker. The possible settings are LRG (large), SML (small) and NONE. NONE 1E LFE/BASS OUT Selects a speaker for the LFE signal output and low bass signal. The possible settings are SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, and BOTH. BOTH 1F MAIN LEVEL Selects the output level for the main channel signal. The possible settings are Normal and –10 dB. Normal PREPARATION Item INTRODUCTION This unit has 6 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings as well as other possible settings. If the initial settings are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, change the settings on the SET MENU (see page 36). LRG BASIC OPERATION ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 21 0104V1000_19-23_EN 21 8/29/0, 1:33 PM ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS This section explains how to adjust the speaker output levels by using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is made, the output level heard at the listening position will be the same from each speaker. This is important for the best performance of the digital sound field processor, the Dolby Pro Logic decoder, Dolby Digital decoder and DTS decoder. Note 1 STANDBY /ON Front panel 2 • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. Before You Begin 3 1 INPUT VOLUME Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power. Turn on the video monitor. Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of the main speakers, press both A and B. SPEAKERS A B Front panel Set BASS and TREBLE on the front panel to the center position and set BASS EXTENSION to OFF. 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE BASS D I G I T A L TREBLE BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D-TV/LD CD-R SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT CBL/SAT VCR 1 PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET TUNING /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE TUNER EDIT PHONES CD ON OFF VCR2 /DVR V-AUX EFFECT BASS MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R – TREBLE + – + OFF Set to OFF. OPTICAL PROGRAM PHONO – REC OUT/ZONE 2 SILENT + – + Front panel VIDEO AUX 4 2 3 3 DISC PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SET MENU SLEEP 4 Sit in the listening position and set PARAMETER/SET MENU on the remote control to PARAMETER. TEST 22 0104V1000_19-23_EN ON 22 8/29/0, 1:33 PM PARAMETER SET MENU Remote control ADJUSTING THE SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS The state of the test tone output is also shown on the monitor by an image of the audio listening room. This is convenient for adjusting each speaker level. Using the Test Tone (TEST DOLBY SUR.) TV VOL – + 2 3 • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set the unit in the standby mode and check the speaker connections. + MUTE CH TV MUTE VOLUME EFFECT – – Note DISC PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SET MENU 1,5 SLEEP y TEST 4 3 Press k / n repeatedly to select the speaker to be adjusted. • You can stop the sequence temporarily by holding down k / n. 1 5 When the adjustment is complete, press TEST. The test tone stops and the TEST current DSP program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. Press TEST to output the test tone. TEST 2 Adjust the volume so you can hear the test tone. The test tone is heard from the left main speaker, center speaker, right main speaker, right rear speaker, rear center speaker (see page 17) and left rear speaker in order. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds each time. LEFT RIGHT (TEST LEFT) (TEST RIGHT) + VOLUME CENTER (TEST CENTER) – RIGHT SURROUND (TEST R SUR.) • The tonal quality of the center speaker can be adjusted by using “5 CENTER GEQ” on the SET MENU (see page 41). • You can increase the output levels of the effect speakers (center, left rear, right rear and rear center) to +10 dB. If the output level of these speakers is lower than that of the main speakers even after you have increased the output level of these speakers up to +10 dB, set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 40). This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1F MAIN LEVEL” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center, rear and rear center speakers again. APPENDIX LEFT SURROUND (TEST L SUR.) y ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press –/+ repeatedly to adjust the output level of the effect speakers so that the output level coming from each speaker is the same. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. ADVANCED OPERATION 4 BASIC OPERATION y PREPARATION TV INPUT LEFT • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is automatically output from the left and right main speakers. A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TEST DOLBY SUR. INTRODUCTION Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the 6 speakers required for a surround sound system. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position with the remote control. After completing the adjustments, use VOLUME +/– at your listening position to check if the adjustments are satisfactory. REAR CENTER (TEST R CENTER) English 23 0104V1000_19-23_EN 23 8/29/0, 1:33 PM BASIC OPERATION BASIC PLAYBACK 1 3 3 5 INPUT VOLUME 2 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D-TV/LD CD-R SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET TUNING /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 EDIT PHONES CD ON OFF EFFECT VCR2 /DVR V-AUX BASS MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R 3 – SILENT 2 5 + – + VIDEO AUX 6 5 MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF SPEAKERS A B Front panel TREBLE OPTICAL PROGRAM PHONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers to be used. If you are using two sets of main speakers, press both A and B. Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (or press one of the input selector buttons) to select the input source. • The current input source is indicated on the front panel display with an arrow. • The current input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display and on the video monitor for a few seconds. ON PHONO SYSTEM 1 POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER D-TV/LD CBL/SAT PHONO MD/TAPE VCR 1 CD-R VCR 2/DVR CD INPUT 3 V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD or DVD 6CH INPUT TITLE Front panel ENTER Remote control SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER MENU SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB / 6 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES VIRTUAL 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 8 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB TV INPUT – + Select this: MUTE CH TV MUTE – + 5 VOLUME EFFECT – DISC DVD: D-TV/LD: CBL/SAT: VCR 1: VCR 2/DVR: V-AUX: 1 Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) to turn on the power. Turn on the video monitor. The front panel display and the video monitor show the level of the main volume for a few seconds and then switch to show the current DSP program. PHONO: CD: TUNER: CD-R: MD/TAPE: SYSTEM Remote control 24 0105V1000_24-29_EN 24 CT VOLUME D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO To reproduce the signal from this component DVD player TV or digital TV/LD player Cable TV/satellite tuner Video cassette recorder 1 Video cassette recorder 2/digital video recorder Another A/V component (connected to the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel) Turntable CD player AM/FM tuner CD recorder MD recorder/tape deck or Front panel RT dB ms POWER STANDBY /ON PTY Selected input source A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV VOL PS DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED 8/29/0, 1:33 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 6 Use the digital sound field processor. See page 28. 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT 10KEY DSP PROGRAM or HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 6 7 or 5 MONO MOVIE Remote control Front panel 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 Front panel JAZZ CLUB /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 Remote control ■ To mute the sound 5 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. VOLUME + VOLUME or – Front panel BASS Remote control TREBLE y • You can also cancel mute to press any operation buttons such as VOLUME +/–. • During muting, “MUTE ON” appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. ■ When you have finished using this unit Press STANDBY/ON (or STANDBY) to set this unit in the standby mode. ■ Notes on the digital signal The digital input jacks of this unit can also handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. (To utilize this, use a source that supports 96-kHz sampling digital signals and set the player for digital output. Refer to the operation instructions for the player.) Note the following when a 96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: 1. The following indication will appear on the front panel display. – + – ON + OFF Front panel Note • If the component connected to the VCR 1 OUT, VCR 2/DVR OUT, CD-R OUT and MD/TAPE OUT jacks is turned off, the reproduced sound may be distorted or the volume may be lowered. In these cases, turn on the component. VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO 2. DSP programs cannot be selected. Sound will be output as normal 2-channel stereo sound from only the left and right main speakers. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT ADVANCED OPERATION Adjust the volume to the desired output level. If desired, use BASS, TREBLE and BASS EXTENSION, etc. These controls are only effective for sound from the main speakers. MUTE BASIC OPERATION 4 Press MUTE on the remote control. To restore the audio output to the previous volume level, press MUTE again. PREPARATION Notes • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons), press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. • If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press 6CH INPUT. INTRODUCTION To select a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. Note 3. Adjustment of the speaker output level described on page 45 cannot be made. APPENDIX • If “1B MAIN SP” on the SET MENU is set to SMALL or “1E LFE/BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, the sound is also output from the subwoofer. English 25 0105V1000_24-29_EN 25 8/29/0, 1:33 PM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. (For example, you can listen to classical music while you are watching a video.) Select a source from the video group and then select a source from the audio group with the input selector buttons on the remote control. The BGV function does not work if you select the sources with INPUT l / h on the front panel. PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD Remote control Input Modes and Indications This unit comes with various input jacks. If your component is connected to more than one type of input jack, you can set the priority of the input signal. When you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” on the SET MENU (see page 42 for details). AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is automatically selected in the following order: 1) Dolby Digital or DTS signal 2) Digital (PCM) signal 3) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. When LD is selected as the input source (China and general models only) AUTO: In this mode, this unit automatically selects the signal in the following order: 1) Dolby Digital RF signal 2) DTS signal 3) Digital (PCM) signal 4) Analog signal D.D. RF: This unit only selects the Dolby Digital RF signal. DTS: This unit only selects the DTS signal. DGTL: This unit only selects digital (PCM) signal input through the OPTICAL jacks. ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected even if a digital signal is input at the same time. Notes Press INPUT MODE (or the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display and on the video monitor. PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD INPUT MODE or Front panel VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB Remote control PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX • If digital signals are input from both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, the digital signal from the COAXIAL jack is selected. • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting and reproduces 5.1 channel source. • The sound output may be interrupted for some LD and DVD players in the following situation: The input mode is set to AUTO. A search is performed while playing the disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS, and then disc playing is restored. The sound output is interrupted for a moment because the digital signal was selected again. DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO Input mode 26 0105V1000_24-29_EN 26 8/29/0, 1:34 PM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Notes on playing a source encoded with a DTS signal PREPARATION • For LD software that does not contain a digital soundtrack, connect the LD player to the analog jacks and set the input mode to AUTO or ANALOG. • If the LD player is transmitting a signal by a nonstandard method, this unit cannot detect the Dolby Digital or DTS signal. In this case, the decoder automatically switches to PCM or analog. • Some A/V components such as LD players output different audio signals through their analog and digital jacks. Change the input mode as necessary. • While you are operating the LD player and playing a disc encoded with a Dolby Digital signal, if you switch from the pause or chapter forwarding function to normal playback, you may hear the PCM or analog sound an instant before the Dolby Digital signal is played. • (China and general models only) See page 14 about the q RF (AC-3) input jack. INTRODUCTION BASIC OPERATION ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit reproduces the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. When you want to play a DTS source, be sure to connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to AUTO, there will be a moment of noise while the unit recognizes the DTS signal and turns on the DTS decoder. This is not a malfunction. You can avoid this by setting the input mode to DTS beforehand. • If you continue to play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode setting left to AUTO, this unit automatically switches to the “DTS-decoding” mode to prevent noise from being generated during subsequent operation. (The “t” indicator lights up on the front panel display.) The “t” indicator will flash immediately after playback of a source encoded with a DTS signal has finished. Only a source encoded with a DTS signal can be played back while this indicator is flashing. If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. • The “t” indicator will flash when the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or skip operation is performed while playing back a source encoded with a DTS signal. If this status continues for 30 or more seconds, the unit will automatically switch from the “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode and the “t” indicator will go out. ■ Notes on playing an LD source APPENDIX English 27 0105V1000_24-29_EN 27 8/29/0, 4:27 PM BASIC PLAYBACK Notes Selecting a Sound Field Program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. For details about each program, see pages 63 to 66. INPUT VOLUME 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE MD/TAPE DVD D-TV/LD CD-R SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 EFFECT VCR2 /DVR V-AUX OFF PRESET TUNING /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE EDIT PHONES CD ON BASS MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R TREBLE OPTICAL PROGRAM PHONO – REC OUT/ZONE 2 SILENT + + – VIDEO AUX 2 10KEY DSP 1 2 6.1/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 MONO MOVIE 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 10 11 0 +10 CHP/INDEX /DTS SUR. 12 +100 A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT – ■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder DISC 1 • Choose a DSP program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ Normal or PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. However, if “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers. • When a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected, the digital sound field processor cannot be used. • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, the DSP program cannot be selected. In this case, the sound is reproduced as normal 2-channel stereo. If you want to utilize the rear center speaker with a 5.1 channel source, press 6.1/ES. However, note that to achieve the proper effect with the rear center channel, the Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software should be used (see “12 6.1/ES AUTO” on pages 43 and 66 for details). 10KEY DSP Set 10KEY/DSP to DSP on the remote control. 6.1/ES Remote control 2 Press one of the DSP program group buttons (or PROGRAM l / h on the front panel) repeatedly until the DSP program you want appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. For example, to select the sub-program “Spectacle,” press MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly. HALL 1 HALL 2 1 2 3 4 STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 6 7 ROCK CONCERT PROGRAM or 5 MONO MOVIE CHURCH JAZZ CLUB VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PS PTY RT CT PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP MEMORY TUNED The “ c ” indicator lights up. 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 CHP/INDEX Remote control /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 Remote control Front panel Program group VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PS PTY RT CT PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO Program name (sub-program) 28 0105V1000_24-29_EN 28 8/29/0, 1:34 PM VOLUME D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP and SILENT CINEMA DSP Press EFFECT to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. EFFECT EFFECT or Front panel Remote control Notes BASIC OPERATION • If you turn off the sound effect, no sound is output from the center, rear and rear center speakers. • If you turn off the sound effect while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center, rear and rear center channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effect or if you set “10B D-RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. PREPARATION Note • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR L/R SP” is set to NONE in the following cases: – when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL/Normal or DTS/ Normal program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when the Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is played; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. INTRODUCTION You can experience the virtual CINEMA DSP sound field by setting “1C REAR L/R SP” on the SET MENU to NONE. The sound field processing is changed to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode according to the selected DSP program. Virtual CINEMA DSP is performed by using the main speakers. You can also listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is on. Normal Stereo Reproduction ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 29 0105V1000_24-29_EN 29 8/29/0, 1:34 PM TUNING Connecting the Antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and general models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing 100 kHz/10 kHz differs in different areas, set the 50 kHz/ 9 kHz FM AM FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating at FREQUENCY STEP the rear) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) (General model) DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ TAPE CD-R OPTICAL TUNER ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 2 1 3 4 5 Antenna stand 1 Press and hold the tab to unlock the terminal hole. 2 Insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Release the tab to lock the lead wires. Lightly pull the lead wires to confirm a good connection. 4 Attach the loop antenna to the antenna stand. 5 Orient the AM loop antenna so that the best reception is obtained. AM ANT GND CD CD-R 75 UNBAL. FM ANT DVD GND D-TV /LD OPTICAL COAXIAL CD CBL /SAT IN LD RF (AC-3) COAXIAL: SELECT BY SETMENU DIGITAL INPUT y RS232C OUT REMOTE CONTROL Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the indoor FM antenna • The AM loop antenna can be removed from the stand and attached to a wall, etc. Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. Connect the included indoor FM antenna to the 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT terminal. Note • Do not connect an outdoor FM antenna and the indoor FM antenna at the same time. 30 0106V1000_30-35_EN 30 8/29/0, 1:34 PM TUNING y Automatic (or Manual) Tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. 1 INPUT VOLUME 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. D I G I T A L 3 D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE MD/TAPE DVD D-TV/LD CD-R SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING TUNER VCR2 /DVR V-AUX OFF PRESET TUNING /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE EDIT PHONES CD ON EFFECT BASS MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R TREBLE Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. OPTICAL – REC OUT/ZONE 2 SILENT + – + VIDEO AUX AUTO Goes off AUTO/MAN'L MONO 4 1 2 3 Press INPUT l / h to select TUNER as the input source. INPUT VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB EDIT Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. or TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to the desired station manually. PRESET/ TUNING Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. Note • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. PRESET /TUNING DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINM ADDITIONAL INFORMATION VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB EDIT Turn this indicator off. 4 ADVANCED OPERATION Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINM Turn this indicator off. 4 FM/AM 3 PRESET /TUNING BASIC OPERATION 2 If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. PREPARATION TUNING MODE PROGRAM PHONO INTRODUCTION • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station because the signal is weak. • When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. APPENDIX Press PRESET/TUNING l or h once to begin automatic tuning. PRESET/ Press h to tune in to a higher TUNING frequency, or press l to tune in to a lower frequency. Press the same button again if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station. English 31 0106V1000_30-35_EN 31 8/29/0, 1:34 PM TUNING Notes Presetting Stations ■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM stations) You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables the unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in to any preset station by selecting the preset station number (see page 33). INPUT VOLUME 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE MD/TAPE DVD D-TV/LD CD-R SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING TUNER VCR2 /DVR V-AUX OFF PRESET TUNING /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE EDIT PHONES CD ON EFFECT BASS MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R TREBLE OPTICAL PROGRAM PHONO – REC OUT/ZONE 2 SILENT + + – VIDEO AUX 132 1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB MAN'L/AUTO FM PS PTY • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply following the procedure in the section “Manually presetting stations” on page 33. • If the number of the received stations does not reach E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations” on page 33. RT Automatic preset tuning options You can select the preset number from which the unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Before automatic preset tuning begins (after pressing MEMORY in step 3): 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZO NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLE PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 32 0106V1000_30-35_EN 32 8/29/0, 1:34 PM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations 5 You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. VOLUME 6CH INPUT D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE MD/TAPE DVD D-TV/LD CD-R SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING TUNER VCR2 /DVR V-AUX OFF PRESET TUNING /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE EDIT PHONES CD ON EFFECT BASS MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R TREBLE OPTICAL PROGRAM PHONO VIRTUAL – REC OUT/ZONE 2 SILENT + – + DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB VIDEO AUX PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX INTRODUCTION INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The station band and MEMORY frequency appear on the front MAN'L/AUTO FM panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. Shows the displayed station has been stored as A1. 1 2 2,5 6 Tune in to a station. See page 31 for tuning instructions. Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. PREPARATION 3 4 MEMORY MEMORY Flashes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears and make sure that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display next to the band indication. VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB 4 You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can also tune a preset station with the remote control. Press TUNER to select TUNER as the input source. INPUT 6CH INPUT D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D-TV/LD CD-R SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT CBL/SAT VCR 1 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING TUNER OFF VCR2 /DVR V-AUX PRESET TUNING /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE EDIT PHONES CD ON EFFECT BASS MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R TREBLE OPTICAL PROGRAM PHONO – REC OUT/ZONE 2 SILENT + – + VIDEO AUX ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. PRESET/ Press h to select a higher TUNING preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. VOLUME INPUT MODE DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINM 1 2 1 2 ADVANCED OPERATION A/B/C/D/E Tuning in to a Preset Station BASIC OPERATION MAN'L/AUTO FM A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT – DISC APPENDIX English 33 0106V1000_30-35_EN 33 8/29/0, 1:34 PM TUNING 1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. A/B/C/D/E Exchanging Preset Stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. A/B/C/D/E or INPUT VOLUME 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE TV INPUT D I G I T A L Front panel Remote control D I G I TA L SURROUND STANDBY /ON 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET +/–) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. SOURCE /REMOTE MD/TAPE DVD D-TV/LD CD-R SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET TUNING /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 EDIT PHONES CD ON OFF VCR2 /DVR V-AUX EFFECT BASS MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R TREBLE OPTICAL PROGRAM PHONO + – REC OUT/ZONE 2 SILENT + – VIDEO AUX 2,4 PRESET + PRESET/ TUNING or – DISC Front panel VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB 1 Tune in to preset station “E1”. See “Tuning in to a Preset Station” on page 33. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. CH Remote control PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX PRESET /TUNING DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB EDIT 3 PTY Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the buttons on the front panel. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB 4 PS DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON DOLBY DIGITAL NEWS INFO AFF PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY T PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. PRESET /TUNING EDIT VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZON NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLE PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED Shows the exchange of stations has been completed. 34 0106V1000_30-35_EN 34 8/29/0, 1:34 PM BASIC RECORDING Notes Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. INPUT VOLUME 6CH INPUT INPUT MODE D I G I T A L D I G I TA L SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D-TV/LD CD-R SPEAKERS A B BASS PROCESSOR EXTENSION DIRECT A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 OFF EFFECT VCR2 /DVR V-AUX PRESET TUNING /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MODE EDIT PHONES CD ON BASS MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R TREBLE OPTICAL PROGRAM PHONO – REC OUT/ZONE 2 SILENT + – + VIDEO AUX 2 Turn on the power to the unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from by using REC OUT/ZONE 2. • To record the current input source, set REC OUT/ ZONE 2 to SOURCE/REMOTE. SOURCE /REMOTE MD/TAPE DVD D-TV/LD CD-R TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2 /DVR V-AUX PHONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 • To record a source that you do not want to simultaneously watch or listen to, set REC OUT/ ZONE 2 to the source you want to record. SOURCE /REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE D-TV/LD CD-R CD VCR2 /DVR V-AUX PHONO REC OUT/ZONE 2 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. If you want to listen to another source, and REC OUT/ZONE 2 is not set to SOURCE/REMOTE, select the source you want to reproduce with INPUT l / h and adjust the volume. y • Setting REC OUT/ZONE 2 to SOURCE/REMOTE and using the BGV function (see page 26) allows the recording of audio and video from a different source. For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be recorded as follows: • LDs Set your LD player’s left and right outputs to the analog soundtrack. • DVDs Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. • CDs The DTS signal recorded on CDs can only be output as a digital bitstream, and therefore cannot be recorded. APPENDIX 3 The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software ADVANCED OPERATION CD If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. BASIC OPERATION 1 PREPARATION SURROUND STANDBY /ON • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS, TREBLE, BASS EXTENSION, VOLUME, “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not affect the recorded material. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal by your VCR. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. INTRODUCTION REC OUT/ZONE 2 allows you to record one source while watching and/or listening to another source. English 35 0106V1000_30-35_EN 35 8/29/0, 1:34 PM ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU The SET MENU consists of 15 items including the speaker mode setting, center graphic equalizer and parameter initialization features. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary. Adjusting the Items on the SET MENU Adjustment should be made with the remote control. y • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. • We recommend that you adjust the items on the SET MENU while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display on this unit while adjusting the items. 10KEY DSP 5 6.1/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 MONO MOVIE 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL Note – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT – DISC • The indication on the front panel display is the abbreviation of the OSD. 1 PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL 2,5 3,4 SPEAKER SET 1A CENTER SP SET MENU SLEEP 1 TEST 1B MAIN SP 1C REAR L/R SP 1D REAR CT SP 1E LFE/BASS OUT Note 1F MAIN LEVEL 2 LOW FRQ TEST 3 L/R BALANCE 4 HP TONE CTRL 5 CENTER GEQ 6 INPUT RENAME 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT 8 INPUT MODE 9 PARAM. INI • Some items require extra steps to change to the desired setting. 1 2 Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to SET MENU. PARAMETER SET MENU Press k / n repeatedly to select the item (1 to 15) you want to adjust. SET MENU 1/4 1 SPEAKER SET 2 LOW FRQ TEST 3 L/R BALANCE 4 HP TONE CTRL / :Up/Down –/+ Enter 10 DOLBY D. SET 3 10A LFE LEVEL 10B D-RANGE 11 DTS LFE LEVEL Press – or + once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the video monitor or on the front panel display. 12 6.1/ES AUTO 2 LOW FRQ TEST 13 SP DELAY TIME TEST TONE • • • • • OFF OUTPUT • • • MAIN L/R FRQ • • • • • • • • • • 88Hz 14 DISPLAY SET 15 MEMORY GUARD 36 0107V1000_36-46_EN 36 8/29/0, 1:35 PM SET MENU Depending on the item, press k / n to select a sub item. 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. You must set the output mode when you use a subwoofer. TEST TONE • • • • • OFF OUTPUT • • • MAIN L/R FRQ • • • • • • • • • 88Hz Notes 4 Press –/+ repeatedly to change the setting of the item. ■ 1A CENTER SP (center speaker mode) TEST TONE • • • • • •ON OUTPUT • • • MAIN L/R FRQ • • • • • • • • • 88Hz 5 10KEY DSP or HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 8 MONO MOVIE 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. ADVANCED OPERATION 1A CENTER SP LRG SML NONE SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1A CENTER SP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the settings of the SET MENU you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the items again. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG BASIC OPERATION Press k / n repeatedly until the current DSP program appears or simply press one of the DSP program group buttons to exit from the SET MENU. By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, the unit can provide good dialog localization for many listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. The OSD shows a large, small or no center speaker depending on how you set this item. PREPARATION 2 LOW FRQ TEST • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, level adjustments in items 1B and 1E are possible, but those in items 1A, 1C, 1D and 1F are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items 1A through 1F are not affected. INTRODUCTION 2 LOW FRQ TEST APPENDIX LRG SML NONE English 37 0107V1000_36-46_EN 37 8/29/0, 1:35 PM SET MENU NONE Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signals are directed to the left and right main speakers. 1A CENTER SP LRG SML NONE ■ 1B MAIN SP (main speaker mode) ■ 1C REAR L/R SP (rear speaker mode) The OSD shows large, small or no rear speakers depending on how you set this item. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: LRG LRG Select this if you have large left and right rear speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the left and right rear speakers. The OSD shows large or small main speakers depending on how you set this item. 1C REAR L/R SP Choices: LARGE, SMALL Initial setting: LARGE LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the left and right main channel signal is directed to the left and right main speakers. 1B MAIN SP LRG SML NONE SML Select this if you have small left and right rear speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1C REAR L/R SP LARGE SMALL SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1B MAIN SP LRG SML NONE NONE Select this if you do not have rear speakers. In this case, the rear center speaker mode will automatically be set to NONE and “1D REAR CT SP” will be skipped. 1C REAR L/R SP LARGE SMALL LRG SML NONE Note • When you select MAIN for “1E LFE/BASS OUT”, the lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. y • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode by selecting NONE for “1C REAR L/R SP”. 38 0107V1000_36-46_EN 38 8/29/0, 1:35 PM SET MENU By adding a rear center speaker to your speaker configuration, the unit can provide more realistic front-toback and back-to-front transitions. LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NONE Initial setting: NONE Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH Initial setting: BOTH LRG Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The entire range of the rear center channel signal is directed to the rear center speaker. SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. PREPARATION ■ 1E LFE/BASS OUT (bass out mode) INTRODUCTION ■ 1D REAR CT SP (rear center speaker mode) 1E LFE/BASS OUT 1D REAR CT SP SWFR MAIN BOTH LRG SML NONE MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. BASIC OPERATION SML Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E LFE/BASS OUT”. 1E LFE/BASS OUT 1D REAR CT SP LRG SML NONE 1E LFE/BASS OUT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION NONE Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. All of the rear center channel signals are directed to the left and right rear speakers. BOTH Select this if you use a subwoofer and you want to mix the main channel low-frequency signals with the LFE signals. 1D REAR CT SP SWFR MAIN BOTH LRG SML NONE ADVANCED OPERATION SWFR MAIN BOTH Note APPENDIX • The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) from all main, center, rear and rear center (see page 17) channels are directed to the LFE channel when you select the small speaker setting in items 1A, 1B, 1C and 1D. English 39 0107V1000_36-46_EN 39 8/29/0, 1:35 PM SET MENU ■ 1F MAIN LEVEL (main level mode) 2 Press n to go to “OUTPUT” and press –/+ to select the speaker you want to compare with the subwoofer. If SWFR is selected, the test tone above 90 Hz will not be output from the subwoofer. The test tone will not necessarily be output from the selected speakers. The output mode of the test tone depends on the settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU. 3 Press n to go to “FRQ” and press –/+ to select the frequency you want to use. 4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the controls on the subwoofer so it matches that of the speaker you are comparing it to. Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center and rear speakers with the main speakers because of the unusually high-efficiency performance of the main speakers. Choices: Normal, –10 dB Initial setting: Normal Normal Select this if you can match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 1F MAIN LEVEL Normal –10dB –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 1F MAIN LEVEL ■ About the test tone The test tone is produced by the tone generator. The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter. You can change this center frequency from 35 Hz through 250 Hz in one-sixth octave steps. You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other conditions. Digital generator (wide band noise produced) Noise Normal –10dB Freq. 2 LOW FRQ TEST Center freq. 35 Hz – 250 Hz Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer so it matches that of the other speakers in your configuration. Change the setting with the remote control while sitting in the listening position. 1 Press –/+ to set “TEST TONE” to ON, and adjust the volume with VOLUME +/– so you can hear the tone. Band pass filter Notes • Do not turn up the volume too high. • If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections are correct. 40 0107V1000_36-46_EN 40 8/29/0, 1:35 PM SET MENU 3 L/R BALANCE (balance of the left and right main speakers) Press + to decrease the output level for the left main speaker. Press – for the right main speaker. 1 Press an input selector button (or use INPUT l / h) to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Press –/+ to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 3 Press k / n to select the character you want to use and –/+ to move to the next one. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order. A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, and so on. • Follow the foregoing procedure to rename other inputs. PREPARATION Control range: 10 steps for L/R Initial setting: 0 Use this feature to change the name of the input which appears on the OSD or the front panel display. INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the left and right main speakers. 6 INPUT RENAME 4 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) Note • You can use up to 8 characters to rename the inputs. 4 BASIC OPERATION Control range (dB): –6 to +3 Initial setting: 0 dB for both BASS and TRBL (treble) Press + repeatedly to exit from INPUT RENAME. 7 I/O ASSIGNMENT Control range (dB): –6 to +6 Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band ■ 7A [A] [B] (for the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks) 1 Press n to select a higher frequency and k to select a lower frequency. Initial settings: [A] DVD [B] D-TV/LD 2 Press –/+ to adjust the level of that frequency. ■ 7B (1) (2) (for the OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks) y Initial settings: (1) MD/TAPE (2) CD-R ■ 7C (3) to (6) (for the OPTICAL INPUT jacks) Initial settings: (3) CD (4) CD-R (5) DVD (6) D-TV/LD APPENDIX • You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this item by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the foregoing procedure. “TEST DOLBY SUR.” appears on the video monitor, and the test tone starts alternating among the speakers. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone, press TEST (see pages 22 and 23). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Use this feature to designate the input for the COMPONENT jacks (A and B) and the DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks (1 to 8 (or 9 for the China and general models only)) to any sources you want. ■ 7D (7) (8) (9 (China and general models only)) (for the COAXIAL INPUT jacks) English Initial settings: (7) CD (8) CBL/SAT (9) LD RF Note • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. 41 0107V1000_36-46_EN 41 8/29/0, 1:35 PM ADVANCED OPERATION Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies. SET MENU 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 26 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST Initial setting: AUTO AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. 9 PARAM. INI (parameter initialization) 10 DOLBY D. SET (Dolby Digital set) This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital signals. ■ 10A LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital signal. The LFE signal carries the lowfrequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Control value (dB): –20 to 0 Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. ■ 10B D-RANGE (dynamic range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each DSP program within a DSP program group. When you initialize a DSP program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Press the DSP program group button on the remote control for the DSP program you want to initialize. All of the DSP programs within the selected program group are initialized. Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN Initial setting: MAX for both SP (speaker) and HP (headphones) • Select MAX for feature films. • Select STD for general use. • Select MIN for listening to sources at an extremely low volume level. MAX y Output level • The asterisk mark (*) next to a DSP program group number indicates that you have changed the parameter values in one or more DSP programs within that group. Notes Input level MIN Output level STD Dialog level H-LEVEL CUT 0.0 1.0 1.0 Output level • You cannot initialize the individual DSP programs within a group separately. • The parameter values of the DSP programs do not change if you initialize a program group that does not have the asterisk mark (*). • When “15 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON (see page 44), you cannot initialize any program groups. • Once you initialize a DSP program group, you cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings. Dialog level Dialog level 0.0 L-LEVEL BST Input level Input level Note • When you select MIN, the sound output may be faint because some Dolby Digital signals are not compatible with the minimum-level dynamic range. In this case, select MAX or STD. 42 0107V1000_36-46_EN 42 8/29/0, 1:35 PM SET MENU 11 DTS LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. 12 6.1/ES AUTO Control range (ms): 0 to 5 for the center speaker 0 to 30 for the rear center speaker BASIC OPERATION Use this feature to switch the audio mode of the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder on or off. Center speaker image Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: ON C ON Select this to allow this unit to automatically turn on the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder when a signal with the appropriate identification is detected. L RL R RC RR ADVANCED OPERATION OFF Select this if you want to turn on or off the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder manually by pressing 6.1/ ES on the remote control. C PREPARATION Control range (dB): –10 to +10 Initial setting: 0 dB for both SPEAKER and HEADPHONE Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center and rear center channel sounds. This feature works when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Ideally, the center speaker and rear center speaker should be the same distance from the listening position as the left and right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker or the rear center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers or rear speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker and the rear center speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker and the rear center speaker to the listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the left and right main speakers and the left and right rear speakers to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialog. INTRODUCTION This setting is effective only when this unit decodes DTS signals. 13 SP DELAY TIME RC • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Rear center speaker image y APPENDIX English 43 0107V1000_36-46_EN 43 8/29/0, 1:35 PM SET MENU 14 DISPLAY SET ■ BLUE BACK > AUTO/OFF You can set the OSD background to blue if the video source is not being reproduced (or the power of the source component is off). ■ OSD SHIFT (OSD off-set position) This setting is used to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display. 15 MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other settings on this unit. Choices: ON, OFF Initial setting: OFF Select ON to protect the following features: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • Center, rear, rear center (see page 17) speakers and subwoofer levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode Notes • When “15 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When “15 MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. 44 0107V1000_36-46_EN 44 8/29/0, 1:35 PM ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS 3 Adjustment should be made with the remote control. PARAMETER 2 1 ON SCREEN LEVEL SET MENU SLEEP Press –/+ to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center, left and right rear or rear center speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB to –20 dB. INTRODUCTION You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, left and right rear, rear center (see page 17) and subwoofer) while listening to a music source. TEST • When PARAMETER/SET MENU is set to SET MENU, you cannot adjust the output level by using LEVEL. However, each time you press LEVEL, the current level of each speaker appears on the front panel display and you can check the speaker level. PREPARATION y 3 Notes 2 Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to PARAMETER. PARAMETER SET MENU LEVEL Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the output level of the effect speakers you adjusted will return to the factory settings. If so, adjust the output level again. ADVANCED OPERATION Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor as follows: center, right rear, rear center (see page 17), left rear and subwoofer. • If the speaker output mode is set to NONE, the output level of that speaker cannot be adjusted. • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. BASIC OPERATION 1 Center speaker output level ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Right rear speaker output level Rear center speaker output level Left rear speaker output level APPENDIX Subwoofer output level y English • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing n. (Pressing k changes the selection in the reverse order.) LEVEL 45 0107V1000_36-46_EN 45 8/29/0, 1:35 PM SLEEP TIMER Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external components connected to AC OUTLET(S). 3 The “SLEEP” indicator soon lights up on the front panel display after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO y • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions for the timer. Canceling the Sleep Timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. Setting the Sleep Timer 1 2 Select a source and start playback on the source component. SLEEP Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time before this unit automatically turns off. y • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL SET MENU SLEEP TEST Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. VIRTUAL DIGITAL PRO LOGIC DSP 6.1/ES SP PCM AB PS PTY RT CT DTS MOVIE THEATER 1 2 PTY HOLD EON STEREO AUTO DOLBY DIGITAL ZONE 2 NEWS INFO AFFAIRS SPORT SLEEP PRO LOGIC ENTERTAINMENT MEMORY TUNED VOLUME dB ms D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR2/DVR V-AUX DVD MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD PHONO 46 0107V1000_36-46_EN 46 8/29/0, 1:35 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES This remote control also has two sophisticated features: Learn and Macro. The Learn feature allows it to acquire functions from the remote controls of other components in your system (or other household appliances) equipped with an infrared remote control receiver. The Macro feature allows you to program a series of operations in sequence for operation by a single button, or to use the factory-set macros to operate other YAMAHA components. These features make it possible for you to reduce the number of remote control in your entertainment room. Control Area ■ Component control area The control area of this unit is the shaded area shown below. You can use the functions within this area no matter which component control area is selected. The component control area is the shaded area shown below. Each component has different functions for the operation buttons in the component control area. The component which has been chosen by pressing an input selector button can be controlled and the display window shows the corresponding name of the input. MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF ON BASIC OPERATION ■ Control area of this unit PREPARATION Notes • For the operating distance of the remote control and notes about batteries, see pages 3 and 8. • For the name and function of each part and button, see pages 6 and 7. • If the memory on the remote control becomes full, no further learning is possible, even if there are still some programmable buttons available (see page 56). INTRODUCTION The remote control can operate this unit as well as other YAMAHA A/V components. To control the components from other manufacturers (or some from YAMAHA), you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer codes. SYSTEM STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER 6.1/ES PAUSE ON SYSTEM STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR PHONO CD DVD TITLE ENTER PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 8 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL – OFF TITLE SOURCE CHP/INDEX + MACRO POWER – CHAPTER + STOP LEARN + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT – Input selector buttons and these buttons also switch the control area for each component MENU DISPLAY SELECT SOUND DISPLAY POWER REC STOP MENU PAUSE PLAY SEARCH / 10KEY DSP POWER HALL 2 HALL 1 / 1 10KEY/DSP (10KEY is selected) ROCK CONCERT MONO MOVIE 9 CHP/INDEX DISC – 3 6 1 7 2 0 6.1/ES + 5 11 +10 MONO MOVIE 6 CH TV MUTE + – – SET MENU 12 7 10 + 0 MUTE JAZZ CLUB 4 TV SPORTS 8 /DTS SUR. 11 12 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E PRESET VOLUME EFFECT TV INPUT TV VOL DISC PARAMETER ON SCREEN LEVEL 3 +100 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 CHP/INDEX TV INPUT 8 MOVIE MOVIE /DTS ENTERTHEATER 1 ROCK THEATER 2 SUR. CONCERT STADIUM TAINMENT 10 PLAY 4 APPENDIX + REC STOP PAUSE CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV VOL SOUND – CHAPTER + ENTERTV STADIUM HALL TAINMENT SPORTS 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 5 6.1/ES ENTER – CHAPTER + SEARCH +– CH TV MUTE – DISC SLEEP TEST 47 47 8/29/0, 1:35 PM English Component control area There are 14 component control areas. You can set up the manufacturer code and program other remote control functions in each area (you cannot set up the manufacturer code in the OPTN area). See pages 54 to 56. 0108V1000_47-53_EN ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 10KEY DSP CLEAR 6CH INPUT / 10KEY/DSP (DSP is selected) MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME SOUND MENU SEARCH REC These buttons switch the control area Factory settings: A for the LD player and B for the satellite tuner. ADVANCED OPERATION Input selector buttons POWER REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ SOURCE SELECT k / n You can control another component independently from the input you have selected by pressing an input selector button. Press SOURCE SELECT k / n to choose the component and set the remote control to be used for it. The display window will show one of the following: (when pressing n) OPTN (option), A, B, PHONO, VAUX, TUNER, MD, CD-R, CD, TV/LD (TV or digital TV/LD), CBSAT (cable TV/satellite tuner), VCR 1, VCR 2, DVD. y • Pressing k shows the same in the reverse order, but you cannot select OPTN. SOURCE SELECT ■ OPTN (option) area OPTN is an extra component control area that can be programmed with other remote control functions. Note • You cannot set up the manufacturer code in this area. See page 53 for the programmable area. 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE MENU DISPLAY SELECT POWER REC SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH STOP PAUSE PLAY / Pressing n always selects OPTN first ■ Zone 2 feature When you make up a second audio-video room with this unit’s Zone 2 feature, you must set “Zone2” as the amplifier library in the remote control first. Selecting “Zone2” by pressing k sets the remote control to the Zone 2 mode. See pages 61 and 62 for details. 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER MENU SEARCH REC STOP SOUND – CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY / Pressing k selects “Zone2” first 48 0108V1000_47-53_EN 48 8/29/0, 1:35 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Each Component Control Area First, press an input selector button or SOURCE SELECT k / n to select a component you want to control. y • The YAMAHA code is factory set for the A, TUNER, MD/TAPE, CD, CD-R and DVD buttons. You must set up the manufacturer code when operating your component (see page 54). ■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area) INTRODUCTION The general operational buttons are shown for each area. Some of them may not function depending on the component you have. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PREPARATION PHONO 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY POWER POWER REC – CHAPTER + STOP PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 6 7 5 Preset group A Preset group B SOUND MENU SEARCH MONO MOVIE 6.1/ES MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E PRESET Preset group A/B/C/D/E + TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE + Preset group E Preset group D Preset group C ADVANCED OPERATION PRESET +/– Preset number 1 to 8 8 /DTS SUR. VOLUME EFFECT – BASIC OPERATION SELECT – DISC ■ Operating a CD player (CD area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SEARCH DISPLAY SELECT POWER POWER SOUND MENU – CHAPTER + SEARCH STOP PAUSE PLAY 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS ROCK CONCERT 5 6.1/ES INDEX MONO MOVIE 6 7 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT Clear Numeric button +10 Numeric button 0 DISC +/– (disc skip) – English TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for your TV in the D-TV/LD or PHONO area. TV INPUT PLAY PAUSE (YAMAHA: Pause/Stop) STOP Numeric buttons 1 to 9 DISC Note • When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. 49 0108V1000_47-53_EN 49 APPENDIX REC / Skip search 8/29/0, 1:35 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating an MD recorder (MD/TAPE area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SEARCH DISPLAY SELECT – CHAPTER + SEARCH POWER POWER Rec/Pause REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 6 7 / 10KEY DSP 5 MONO MOVIE 6.1/ES TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for your TV in the D-TV/LD or PHONO area. SOUND MENU MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 11 12 0 +10 +100 TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE PAUSE STOP Numeric buttons 1 to 9 8 A/B/C/D/E PRESET + PLAY /DTS SUR. 10 CHP/INDEX Skip search + Numeric button +10 Numeric button 0 VOLUME EFFECT – – DISC Note • When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. ■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SEARCH DISPLAY SELECT POWER POWER STOP SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 / 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES INDEX Numeric button 0 MENU 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 8 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 PLAY PAUSE Numeric buttons 1 to 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX Skip search Clear Numeric button +10 A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for your TV in the D-TV/LD or PHONO area. TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT – DISC Note • When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. 50 0108V1000_47-53_EN 50 8/29/0, 1:35 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating an LD player (A area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO INTRODUCTION 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER POWER STOP SOUND – CHAPTER + REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB SOUND CHAPTER –/+ (chapter search) PLAY PAUSE / 10KEY DSP Chapter/Time Numeric button 0 MENU SEARCH PREPARATION DISPLAY SEARCH 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 8 MONO MOVIE 6.1/ES MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX Numeric buttons 1 to 9 /DTS SUR. Clear Numeric button +10 A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + + MUTE CH TV MUTE VOLUME EFFECT – – DISC Notes • The A button is not the input selector and only switches the component area for operating an LD player. • When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Operating a DVD player (DVD area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO 6CH INPUT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TITLE TITLE Menu cursor/ENTER ENTER MENU DISPLAY SEARCH POWER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER SOUND MENU – CHAPTER + SEARCH REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 Audio Skip search PLAY / Return 10KEY DSP MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX PAUSE STOP Numeric buttons 1 to 9 APPENDIX 6.1/ES Title/Index Numeric button 0 Clear Numeric button +10 A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT DISC +/– (disc skip) – DISC Note • When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. 51 0108V1000_47-53_EN 51 8/29/0, 1:35 PM English TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for your TV in the D-TV/LD or PHONO area. BASIC OPERATION TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for your TV in the D-TV/LD or PHONO area. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a VCR (VCR 1, VCR 2/DVR and V-AUX areas) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY Rewind/Fast forward SELECT REC (Press twice to start recording) TV/Video input – CHAPTER + SEARCH POWER POWER SOUND MENU REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 6 7 / 10KEY DSP ROCK CONCERT 5 MONO MOVIE 6.1/ES MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 Numeric buttons 1 to 9 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX PLAY PAUSE STOP Numeric button 10 or 0 A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for your TV in the D-TV/LD or PHONO area. + TV INPUT TV VOL – + + MUTE CH TV MUTE VOLUME EFFECT – – CH +/– (channel) DISC Note • When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. ■ Operating a TV/digital TV (D-TV/LD and PHONO areas) Note • If you operate an LD player in the D-TV/LD area, set the manufacturer code for your LD player in D-TV/LD area, and the manufacturer code for your TV in PHONO area. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY DISPLAY SELECT POWER POWER MENU REC STOP PAUSE PLAY CHURCH JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 6 7 5 6.1/ES Enter TV INPUT SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 Numeric buttons 1 to 9 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX You can control your VCR if you have set up the code for VCR 1. Numeric button 10 or 0 A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV VOL +/– TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT CH +/– (channel) – DISC TV MUTE 52 0108V1000_47-53_EN 52 8/29/0, 1:35 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a cable TV (CBL/SAT area) or satellite tuner (B area) SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO INTRODUCTION 6CH INPUT TITLE Menu cursor/Menu select ENTER MENU DISPLAY SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT – CHAPTER + SEARCH REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 / 10KEY DSP 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 MONO MOVIE 6.1/ES Enter MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 Numeric buttons 1 to 9 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX You can control your VCR if you have set up the code for VCR 1. Recall Numeric button 0 PREPARATION POWER POWER SOUND MENU A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE + VOLUME EFFECT – BASIC OPERATION TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for your TV in the D-TV/LD or PHONO area. CH +/– (channel) – DISC Notes ■ Free area (OPTN area) TITLE ADVANCED OPERATION • The B button is not the input selector and only switches the component area for operating a satellite tuner. • When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY POWER SOUND MENU – CHAPTER + SEARCH REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SELECT / 10KEY DSP ROCK CONCERT 5 6.1/ES MONO MOVIE 6 7 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + APPENDIX TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for your TV in the D-TV/LD or PHONO area. VOLUME EFFECT – DISC Note 53 0108V1000_47-53_EN 53 8/29/0, 1:35 PM English • When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/LD and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/LD area. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the Manufacturer Code 3 You can control other components by setting a manufacturer code. A code can be set up in each component control area except for the OPTN area. Press k / n to select the name of your component’s manufacturer. You will find the names of most worldwide audiovideo manufacturers in alphabetical order in the display window. 6CH INPUT The YAMAHA code is factory set for A, TUNER, CD, MD/TAPE, CD-R and DVD. There is no factory-set code for B, PHONO, V-AUX, D-TV/LD, CBL/SAT, VCR 1 and VCR 2/DVR. 1 TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT Press an input selector button, A or B to select the source component you want to set up. POWER SOUND MENU SEARCH REC STOP – CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY / SYSTEM 2 POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. 4 Press POWER (or any other button) to check if you have set up the code correctly. If the component cannot be POWER controlled with the remote / control, try setting another code for the same manufacturer. y • If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 LEARN Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN Notes Notes • Press LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process is started. • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. • If you have already programmed a remote control function for a button, the function by learning or macro programming takes priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function. • “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER; – when pressing more than one button at once; or – when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET MENU is switched to another position. 54 0109V1000_54-62_EN 54 8/29/0, 1:26 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in “Setting the Manufacturer Code”. 2 Press l / h to select a library (component category). 6CH INPUT TITLE Programming a New Remote Control Function (Learn Feature) If you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the manufacturer code, or a manufacturer code is not available, the following procedure needs to be performed. The possible programming area is the same as a component control area, so the buttons are programmable independently for each source component area. Note ENTER SELECT POWER SEARCH REC SOUND MENU STOP – CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY / There are 13 libraries to set up a manufacturer code: L:TV, L:CAB (CABLE), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR, L:DVD, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (TAPE), L:TUN (TUNER) and *L:AMP. Repeat steps 3 and 4 of the procedure in “Setting the Manufacturer Code”. 1 Set 10KEY/DSP to 10KEY. 2 Press an input selector button, A or B to select a source component. 10KEY DSP BASIC OPERATION 3 • This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of the other remote control’s functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the other remote control.) SYSTEM Note 3 STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO Place this remote control and the other remote control about 50 to 100 mm (2 to 4 in.) apart on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. LEARN CD-R CLEAR MD/TAPE TRANSMIT RE-NAME TUNER STANDBY SYSTEM V-AUX POWER VCR 2/DVR ON MACRO CD OFF DVD PHONO 6CH INPUT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MACRO ENTER VCR 1 TITLE CBL/SAT D-TV/LD • “YPC” is factory-set as the amplifier library. When you make up a second audio-video room with this unit’s Zone 2 feature, you must set “Zone2” as the amplifier library in the remote control (see page 62 for details). ADVANCED OPERATION About amplifier libraries (L:AMP) L:AMP has 4 codes: YPC, Zone2, DSP, and No. “YPC” or “Zone2” should be selected to operate this unit. “DSP” is for operating YAMAHA DSP amplifiers other than this unit. “No” is to clear this unit control area functions. POWER PREPARATION SOURCE DISPLAY INTRODUCTION ■ Controlling a different component from the source component (input) you have selected about 50 to 100 mm (2 to 4 in.) APPENDIX English 55 0109V1000_54-62_EN 55 8/29/0, 1:26 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press LEARN by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to program additional functions. 8 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. LEARN LEARN Notes Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 5 and 6, the learning process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 4. 6 Press and hold the button on the other remote control that has the function you want to program into this remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. MD/TAPE CD-R CLEAR TUNER STANDBY TRANSMIT RE-NAME V-AUX POWER VCR 2/DVR LEARN MACRO ENTER VCR 1 TITLE CBL/SAT SYSTEM Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” is displayed. D-TV/LD 5 ON MACRO OFF CD PHONO DVD 6CH INPUT • It is also possible to program in the control area of this unit with 10KEY/DSP set to DSP. However, if you program functions in this area, you cannot control this unit and select a DSP program. • Even if the batteries in the other remote control have enough power to transmit signals for operation, they may not have enough power to transmit signals to this remote control. • When the remote controls are either too close together or too far apart, you may not be able to program this remote control. • Direct sunlight interferes with infrared rays. • “ERROR” appears in the display window in the following circumstances: – when pressing more than one button at once; or – when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position. LEARN CD-R CLEAR MD/TAPE TRANSMIT RE-NAME TUNER STANDBY VCR 2/DVR SYSTEM V-AUX POWER VCR 1 MACRO ENTER CBL/SAT D-TV/LD TITLE ON MACRO CD OFF DVD PHONO 6CH INPUT Notes • “NG” appears in the display window when programming has not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 5. • When the memory is full, “FULL” appears in the display window, and this remote control cannot acquire any more functions. Clear unnecessary programmed functions to allow this remote control to acquire new functions. 56 0109V1000_54-62_EN 56 8/29/0, 1:26 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Using the Macro Feature Press one of the macro buttons CD Automatically transmits signals of each button sequentially SYSTEM POWER Macro buttons First CD PLAY (CD area) Third PHONO PHONO – V-AUX V-AUX TUNER TUNER PREPARATION Second – (*4) MD/TAPE MD/TAPE CD-R CD-R CD CD D-TV/LD D-TV/LD INTRODUCTION The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations by pressing just one button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all those operations by simply pressing the CD macro button. The macro buttons (the input selector buttons, A and B buttons, SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY) are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 58). – PLAY BASIC OPERATION (MD/TAPE area) (*3) PLAY (CD-R area) (*3) PLAY (CD area) (*3) – SYSTEM POWER CBL/SAT – VCR 1 VCR 1 PLAY VCR 2/DVR VCR 2/DVR DVD DVD (VCR 1 area) (*3) PLAY (VCR 2/DVR area) (*3) ADVANCED OPERATION CBL/SAT (*1) PLAY (DVD area) (*3) – – – ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – POWER SYSTEM POWER / (D-TV/LD area) (*2) STANDBY STANDBY – – – 0109V1000_54-62_EN 57 8/29/0, 1:26 PM English 57 APPENDIX *1 In order to turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit, connect those components to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, please refer to the operation instruction for the connected component.) *2 If the macro you select includes power control functions, the component may be turned off if it is already on when you press the macro button. For example, if your TV is on and you press the SYSTEM POWER macro button, the TV is turned off. *3 Playback can be started with any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorders, CD players, CD recorders, DVD players, and LD players. When using macros to operate other components, it is either necessary to program the PLAY button on the control area of that component (see page 55) or to set up a manufacturer code (see page 54). *4 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit receives the last station when this unit is set in the standby mode. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating the macro 2 MACRO MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF ON MACRO ON/OFF SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO Press a macro button for which you want to program the macro operation. The button you chose for programming the macro operation and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. SYSTEM Macro buttons 6CH INPUT 1 2 STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON. Press a macro button. Note Notes • When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO ON/OFF to OFF. • While this unit is carrying out a macro program, the unit does not receive any other button’s function until the macro operation has been completed (the TRANSMIT indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation has been completed. ■ Programming a macro You can program your own macros and use the Macro feature to transmit many remote control commands by pressing a single button. Notes • The factory-set macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The factory-set macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the factory-set macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. • A macro programming is used to transmit learning or setup (or YAMAHA preset) button signals of this remote control to a macro button. If necessary, set up the manufacturer code or program a function with the remote control for your component. • This remote control handles button signals that operate continuously, such as volume control, as short time interval codes. Macro programming that include these types of macro steps are therefore not recommended. 1 POWER • “AGAIN” appears in the display window when a button other than the macro buttons is pressed. y • If you want to change the source component, use SOURCE SELECT k / n or input selector buttons. When you use the input selector buttons, selecting the input is programmed as a macro step, whereas SOURCE SELECT k / n only changes the component. 3 Press the buttons of the functions that you want to include in the macro operation sequence in order. y • You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits from the macro mode. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO 1 6CH INPUT TITLE MCR 1 : DVD input ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER SEARCH REC SOUND MENU STOP – CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY 2 / 3 MCR 2 : DVD a MCR 3 : DVD p indicate the number of macro steps you entered Press MACRO by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. appear alternately so that you can set up the next step MACRO Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 2 and 3, the macro programming process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 1. Note • “NG” appears in the display window when programming has not been done correctly. In this case, start over from step 2. 58 0109V1000_54-62_EN 58 8/29/0, 1:27 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 4 MACRO Press l / h to move the cursor to the next position. 6CH INPUT TITLE INTRODUCTION Press MACRO again when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. ENTER Note SOURCE DISPLAY • “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – when pressing more than one button at once; or – when MACRO ON/OFF is switched to another position. 1 Press an input selector button, A or B to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. REC SOUND STOP – CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY / y • If you continuously want to rename another source component, press ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the renaming mode. RE-NAME Clearing a Learned Function or Macro 1 Press an input selector button, A or B to select the source component for which you want to clear the function. The selected component name appears in the display window. BASIC OPERATION Changing the Source Name in the Display Window POWER SEARCH PREPARATION Memory back-up If the remote control is without batteries for more than 3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. SELECT MENU SYSTEM SYSTEM STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 PHONO POWER STANDBY CD-R CD V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD VCR 2/DVR DVD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD 2 Press RE-NAME by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. 3 Press k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing n changes the character in the following order: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, - (hyphen). (Pressing k goes in the reverse order.) RE-NAME Press LEARN if you want to clear a learned function, or press MACRO to clear a programmed macro by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 PHONO ADVANCED OPERATION POWER LEARN 6CH INPUT TITLE or ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT SEARCH REC STOP – CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY / Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during step 3, the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. APPENDIX POWER MACRO SOUND MENU English 59 0109V1000_54-62_EN 59 8/29/0, 1:27 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 3 Press and hold CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object, and at the same time press the button for which you want to clear the learned function or macro for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. 2 Press k / n to select the clear mode. The mode is shown in the display window in the following order: (L: name of a component) Clears all learned functions for the component area. Press the input selector button, A or B to select the component. CLEAR Clears all learned functions for this unit control area. Clears all learned functions. Clears all programmed macros. y • You can clear other learned functions and macros at this time by holding down CLEAR again and pressing the other buttons for which those learned functions or macros have been programmed. Clears all renamed source names in the display window. Clears all programmed functions including setup manufacturer codes. This returns to the factory settings. Note • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, try step 3 again. 4 Press LEARN or MACRO again to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared a learned function or macro for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting. 3 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. LEARN or CLEAR MACRO Note Clearing Learned Functions, Macros, Renamed Source Names, and Setup Manufacturer Codes 1 • “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. 4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared a learned function or macro for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting. Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. CLEAR CLEAR Note Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds during steps 2 and 3, the clearing process is canceled. If this happen, start over from step 1. • “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – when pressing a button other than the cursor and ENTER; – when pressing more than one button at once; or – when MACRO ON/OFF, 10KEY/DSP or PARAMETER/SET MENU is switched to another position. 60 0109V1000_54-62_EN 60 8/29/0, 1:27 PM ZONE 2 Only analog signals are sent to the second room. For any source you want to listen to in the second room, you must connect the analog output jack from the source to the corresponding analog input jack on this unit. Zone 2 Connections PREPARATION To use the multi-room functions of this unit, you need the following additional equipment: • An infrared signal receiver in the second room • An infrared emitter in the main room This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second room to the main room (for example, to a CD player or LD player). • An amplifier and speakers for the second room • A video monitor for the second room INTRODUCTION You can make up a multi-room audio-video system with this unit. This feature enables you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room and second room (Zone 2) with the supplied remote control in the second room. y IN OUT REMOTE CONTROL OUT IN BASIC OPERATION OUT • Since there are so many ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 connections which will best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. This unit ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Example of a system configuration and connections ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT Main room Second room DVD player (or other component) This unit ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Amplifier Video monitor Infrared signal receiver Remote control (in the Zone 2 mode) Infrared emitter APPENDIX REMOTE CONTROL OUT REMOTE CONTROL IN English 61 0109V1000_54-62_EN 61 8/29/0, 1:27 PM ZONE 2 ■ Special considerations when using DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Therefore, if you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second room, you will only be able to hear the digital noise sound that could damage your speakers. 4 Press LEARN to complete the Zone 2 setup. LEARN 5 Press SOURCE SELECT k to display “Zone2” in the display window. Due to this characteristic of DTS encoded discs, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For LDs or DVDs encoded with DTS Only 2-channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second room, as follows: • LDs Set your LD player’s left and right outputs to the analog soundtrack. • DVDs Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. SOURCE SELECT 6 Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode. SYSTEM For CDs encoded with DTS DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature for CDs encoded with DTS. 7 Remote Control in Zone 2 POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD You can control the component by using the component control area buttons. In the second room (Zone 2), the supplied remote control can be used for the Zone 2 remote control. You can select the input source and control the component which is located in the main room directly from the second room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER – CHAPTER + SEARCH REC STOP PAUSE PLAY 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in “Setting the Manufacturer Code” on page 54. 6.1/ES 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 Press l / h to select “L:AMP”. 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX 2 SOUND MENU / Before starting the following procedure, set REC OUT/ ZONE 2 on the front panel to SOURCE/REMOTE. 1 PHONO A/B/C/D/E PRESET + 6CH INPUT TV INPUT TV VOL – TITLE + MUTE CH TV MUTE + VOLUME EFFECT – – DISC ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER REC SOUND MENU SEARCH STOP – CHAPTER + PAUSE PLAY / Note • Adjust the Zone 2 volume with the control on the amplifier in the second room. 8 3 Press k / n to select “Zone2”. Press SOURCE SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2 mode. 6CH INPUT TITLE ENTER SOURCE SOURCE DISPLAY SELECT POWER SEARCH REC SOUND MENU STOP – CHAPTER + PAUSE SELECT PLAY / 62 0109V1000_54-62_EN 62 8/29/0, 1:28 PM ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SOUND FIELD PROGRAM The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. INTRODUCTION This unit incorporates a sophisticated, multi-program digital sound field processor (DSP). This processor allows you to electronically expand and change the shape of the audio sound field from both audio and video sources, creating a theater-like experience in your listening room. You can create outstanding audio sound field by selecting a suitable DSP program (this will, of course, depend on what you are listening to) and making desired adjustments. Note PREPARATION • Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below. Hi-Fi DSP Programs ■ For audio sources: Nos. 1 to 7 Features 1 CONCERT HALL 1 — This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully. 2 CONCERT HALL 2 — A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 3 CHURCH — This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. 4 JAZZ CLUB — This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. 5 ROCK CONCERT — The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 6 STADIUM — This program gives you the long delays and extraordinarily spacious feel of an outdoor stadium in Los Angeles that is no less than 300 meters (990 feet) in diameter. 7 ENTERTAINMENT Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. 6ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties. APPENDIX Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Sub-program ADVANCED OPERATION Program (group) BASIC OPERATION No. • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, no sound is output from the center speaker. English 63 0110V1000_63-67_EN 63 8/29/0, 1:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM CINEMA DSP Programs ■ For audio-video sources: Nos. 7 to 9 No. Program (group) Sub-program Features 7 ENTERTAINMENT Game 8 TV SPORTS — Although the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 9 MONO MOVIE — This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. ■ For movie programs: Nos. 10 to 12 No. Program (group) Input source Sub-program 10 MOVIE Spectacle THEATER 1 70 mm Spectacle Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL Spectacle *1 Dolby Digital 2 Spectacle 6.1 * DTS Spectacle *1 Features This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). DTS Spectacle ES *2 Sci-Fi 70 mm Sci-Fi Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL Sci-Fi *1 Dolby Digital Sci-Fi 6.1 * 2 DTS Sci-Fi *1 Sci-Fi ES * This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. DTS 2 64 0110V1000_63-67_EN 64 8/29/0, 1:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM No. Program (group) Sub-program Input source DGTL Adventure *1 Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel Dolby Digital This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. 2 Adventure 6.1 * DTS Adventure *1 DTS INTRODUCTION 11 MOVIE Adventure 70 mm Adventure THEATER 2 Features Adventure ES *2 70 mm General Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DGTL General *1 Dolby Digital General 6.1 *2 DTS General ES *2 BASIC OPERATION DTS General *1 This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. For the surround sound field, the harmony of music or chorus sounds beautifully in a wide space at the rear of the sound field. PREPARATION General ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 65 0110V1000_63-67_EN 65 8/29/0, 1:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM No. Program (group) Sub-program Normal/ 12 q/DTS SURROUND Matrix 6.1/ES PRO LOGIC/Normal Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel DOLBY DIGITAL/ Normal *1 Dolby Digital DOLBY DIGITAL/ Matrix 6.1 *2 DTS DIGITAL SUR./ Normal *1 Features Input source The built-in decoder precisely reproduces sounds and sound effects from sources. The highly efficient decoding process improves crosstalk and channel separation, and makes sound positioning smoother and more precise. In this program, the digital sound field processor is not turned on. DTS DTS DIGITAL SUR./ ES *2 Enhanced PRO LOGIC/Enhanced DOLBY DIGITAL/ Enhanced *1 Analog, PCM, Dolby Digital in 2-channel Dolby Digital DOLBY DIGITAL/ Enhanced 6.1 *2 DTS DIGITAL SUR./ Enhanced *1 This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. DTS DTS DIGITAL SUR./ Enhanced ES *2 *1 The Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder is off. *2 The Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder is on. The “ c ” indicator lights up on the front panel display. y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will be automatically switched to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. • If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when “12 6.1/ES AUTO” on the SET MENU is set to ON, the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder will automatically turn on and the corresponding DSP program will be selected. • 6.1/ES on the remote control can be used to turn the Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1 or DTS ES decoder on or off during Dolby Digital 5.1channel source or DTS 5.1-channel source playback. Notes • The “ x ” indicator does not light up when selecting the sub-program “Normal” of the q/DTS SURROUND program. • If “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE, no sound is output from the center speaker. • The effect sound is output from the main speakers when a monaural source is played with CINEMA DSP program groups 7 (Game) and 8 to 11. 66 0110V1000_63-67_EN 66 8/29/0, 1:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM MOVIE THEATER Programs ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect These programs express an immense sound field and a large surround effect. They also give depth to the sound from the main speakers to recreate the realistic sound of a Dolby Stereo theater. Presence DSP sound field PREPARATION The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER 70-mm programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With the unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being at a public theater in your listening room by using Dolby Digital or DTS technology. INTRODUCTION Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. BASIC OPERATION Surround DSP sound field ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect ■ Dolby Digital Matrix 6.1/DTS ES + DSP sound field effect These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects since an extra rear center DSP sound field created from the rear center channel is added. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Right surround DSP sound field Left surround DSP sound field ADVANCED OPERATION These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround and right surround channels. This processing enables the this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital- or DTSequipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Presence DSP sound field APPENDIX English 67 0110V1000_63-67_EN 67 8/29/0, 1:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING What is a sound field? What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. These reflections fall into specific patterns as shown in the diagram on page 70 for any particular environment, and provide vital information to our ears. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. Sound Field Program Parameters DSP programs consist of some parameters to determine the apparent room size, reverberation time, distance from you to the performer, etc. In each program, these parameters are set with values precisely calculated by YAMAHA to create a sound field unique to the program. It is recommended to use DSP programs without changing the values of parameters; however, this unit also allows you to create your own sound fields. Starting with one of the built-in programs, you can adjust those parameters. Each DSP program has a set of parameters that allow you to change the characteristics of the acoustic environment to precisely create the effect you want. These parameters correspond to the many natural acoustic factors that create the sound field you experience in an actual concert hall or other listening environment. The size of the room, for example, affects the length of time between the early reflections. The “ROOM SIZE” parameter provided in many of the DSP programs alters the timing between these reflections, thus changing the shape of the “room” you are listening. In addition to room size, the shape of the room and the characteristics of its surfaces have a significant effect on the final sound. Surfaces that absorb sound, for example, cause the reflections and reverberations to die out more quickly, while highly reflective surfaces allow the reflections to carry on for a longer period of time. The digital sound field parameters allow you to control these and many other factors that contribute to your personal sound field, allowing you to essentially “redesign” the concert halls, theaters, etc. provided to create custom-tailored listening environments that ideally match your mood and music. See “Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions” on pages 70 to 73. 68 0111V1000_68-73_EN 68 8/29/0, 1:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Changing Parameter Settings Press k / n to select the parameter. 5 Press –/+ to change the parameter value. Adjustments should be made with the remote control. y y • When you set the parameter to a value other than the factoryset value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. • We recommended that you edit the parameter while using a video monitor. It is easier to see the video monitor than it is to see the front panel display. 3 6.1/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 MONO MOVIE 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E PRESET + – + TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE CH TV MUTE + VOLUME EFFECT – – DISC PARAMETER 1 ON SCREEN LEVEL SET MENU SLEEP TEST Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to change other program parameters. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter value again. BASIC OPERATION 2 4 5 6 Resetting a Parameter to the Factory-set Value 2 SET MENU Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. ON SCREEN ■ To reset all of the parameters to the factory-set values Select a DSP program you want to adjust. 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 1 2 3 4 STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 6 7 ROCK CONCERT 5 MONO MOVIE 9 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 8 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 Program name (group) P05 ROCK CONCERT Cursor 15ms 5 1.6s 100ms 7% Notes • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press k / n. • You cannot change parameter values when “15 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “15 MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 44). English INIT.DLY LIVENESS REV.TIME REV.DELAY REV.LEVEL Use “9 PARAM. INI” on the SET MENU to reset all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within the selected group to the factory-set values (see page 42). This operation resets all of the parameter values of all DSP programs within that group to the factory-set values. Parameters Example of ROCK CONCERT 69 0111V1000_68-73_EN 69 APPENDIX Program No. Select the parameter you want to reset. Then press and hold – or + until the value temporarily stops at the factory-set value. The asterisk mark (*) by the parameter name disappears on the video monitor. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 3 PARAMETER Set PARAMETER/SET MENU to PARAMETER. ■ To reset some of the parameters to the factory-set values ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 PREPARATION 10KEY DSP INTRODUCTION You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory-set parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. 4 8/29/0, 1:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Digital Sound Field Parameter Descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Note • Not all of the following parameters can be found in every program. ■ INIT.DLY (initial delay) (P.INIT.DLY — for the presence sound field) Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the sound source by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. Control range: 1 – 99 msec Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther the apparent distance seems. For a small room, this parameter would be set to a small value, for a large room, set it to a large value. First reflection Early reflections Time INT. DLY Level Level Level Sound source Time Time INT. DLY INT. DLY Sound source Reflection surface Large value = 99 ms Small value = 1 ms ■ ROOM SIZE (P.ROOM SIZE — for the presence sound field) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. Control range: 0.1 – 2.0 Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. Sound source Level Level Level Early reflections Time Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 70 0111V1000_68-73_EN 70 8/29/0, 1:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ■ LIVENESS Function: INTRODUCTION This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. Control range: 0 – 10 Description: The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead,” while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live.” The “LIVENESS” parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. Sound source Time Level Level Dead PREPARATION Level Live Time Time Small reflected sound Large reflected sound BASIC OPERATION Sound source Small value = 0 Large value = 10 ■ S.DELAY (surround delay) Function: ■ S.INIT.DLY (surround initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two rear channels are used. Control range: 1 – 49 msec ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround sound field. Control range: 0 – 49 msec (The range depends on the signal format.) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ S.ROOM SIZE (surround room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ S.LIVENESS (surround liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the sound field. Control range: 0 – 10 APPENDIX English 71 0111V1000_68-73_EN 71 8/29/0, 1:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ■ RC.INIT.DLY (rear center initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the rear center sound field. Control range: 1 – 49 msec ■ RC.ROOM.SIZE (rear center room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the rear center sound field. Control range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ RC.LIVENESS (rear center liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the rear center sound field. Control range: 0 – 10 ■ REV.TIME (reverberation time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Control range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Sound source Early reflections Reverberations Short reverberations 60 dB 60 dB Time Time REV. TIME Reverberations Level 60 dB Level Level Reverberations REV. TIME Time REV. TIME Long reverberations Sound source Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s 72 0111V1000_68-73_EN 72 8/29/0, 1:36 PM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING ■ REV.DELAY (reverberation delay) Function: Sound source Level Reverberation INTRODUCTION This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Control range: 0 – 250 msec Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. (dB) PREPARATION 60 dB Time REV. DELAY REV TIME BASIC OPERATION ■ REV.LEVEL (reverberation level) Level Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Control range: 0 – 100% Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Sound source ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REV. LEVEL Time ■ CT.DELAY (center delay) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ LS.DELAY (left surround delay) ■ RC.DELAY (rear center delay) ■ RS.DELAY (right surround delay) Function: These parameters adjust the sound delay for each channel in 6 channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 – 50 msec APPENDIX English 73 0111V1000_68-73_EN 73 8/29/0, 1:36 PM APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly connect the power cord. 19 The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when the unit is in the standby mode. 19 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 16, 17 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). 24 The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 24 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 25 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 25 Digital signals other than PCM audio, Dolby Digital or DTS signal which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — No picture. There is no S-video connection between this unit and the video monitor, although S-video signals are being input to this unit. Connect the monitor’s S-video input jack to this unit’s S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack. 14, 15 The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn the unit back on. 19 The unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound and/or no picture. Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn the unit back on. Only the speaker on one side can be heard. 74 16, 17 The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. 46 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 25 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. Incorrect setting of “3 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU. Adjust it to the appropriate position. 74 0112V1000_74-79_EN 16, 17 8/29/0, 1:36 PM 12 – 17 41 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No sound from the effect speakers. Cause Remedy Press EFFECT to turn it on. 29 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. 63 – 66 25 Raise the level of the center speaker. 45 “1A CENTER SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 38 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 7) has been selected. Select another DSP program. The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. — The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with the program 12. Select another DSP program. “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 39 “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 39 The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). 63 – 66 — “1E LFE/BASS OUT” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN. The output mode for each speaker (main, center or rear) on the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate output mode for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. No sound from the rear center speaker. “1D REAR CT SP” on the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRG or SML. A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 – 15 No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 12, 13 The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to the unit through an MC-head amplifier. 37 – 39 39 12 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The volume level is low while playing a record. 39 ADVANCED OPERATION Poor bass reproduction. 45 BASIC OPERAIONT No sound from the subwoofer. 63 – 66 PREPARATION The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. INTRODUCTION The sound effect is off. A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. No sound from the center speaker. Refer to page APPENDIX English 75 0112V1000_74-79_EN 75 8/29/0, 1:36 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the REC OUT jacks of this unit is turned off. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect by a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. A source component is only connected to the analog input jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the digital input jacks of this unit. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “15 MEMORY GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 44 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 16, 17 The sound is degraded when listening with headphones connected to a tape deck or CD player that is connected to this unit. This unit is in the standby mode. Turn on the power of the unit. — There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or the unit. The unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move the unit further away from such equipment. — Turn on the power to the component. 35 76 0112V1000_74-79_EN 76 12 8/29/0, 1:36 PM 12 – 15 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. 30, 31 There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. 30 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use the manual tuning method. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. The unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. Use the manual tuning method. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 30 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). 32 30, 31 BASIC OPERAIONT There are continuous AM crackling and hissing noises. 30, 31 PREPARATION FM stereo reception is noisy. INTRODUCTION Cause There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM FM antenna. Remedy Refer to page Problem ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 77 0112V1000_74-79_EN 77 8/29/0, 1:36 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem Cause The remote control does not work nor function properly. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. (The TRANSMIT indicator does not light up nor flash.) Continuous functions such as volume adjustment are learned, but operate only for a moment before stopping. Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition the unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones and press RESET. 3 The internal microcomputer has “frozen”. The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Press RESET on the remote control. 3 Replace the batteries (and press RESET on the remote control). 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 55 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. 55 Memory capacity is full. Further learning is not possible without deleting unnecessary functions. The internal microcomputer has “frozen”. Press RESET on the remote control. 3 The learning process is incomplete. Be sure to press and hold the function button on the other remote control until TRANSMIT begins flashing slowly. 56 56, 59, 60 After this unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity) or if you mishandle the operation of this unit, it may not function properly. In these cases, set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and start operating. 78 0112V1000_74-79_EN 78 8/29/0, 1:36 PM SPECIFICATIONS FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms ............................... 100 W 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ohms ................................................ 105 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Others] ......................................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China and general models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ohms ................................................... 140 W • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ......................... 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf)/25 µV (39.2 dBf) • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ohms .............................................. 80 or more • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 ohms, Main L/R .......................... 0.04% AM SECTION • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO MM to REC OUT (5 mV, shorted) [U.S.A., Canada, China and general models] .................... 86 dB [Australia and Singapore models] ..................................... 81 dB CD (200 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off ................... 98 dB • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kohms terminated) to Main L/R .................. 60 dB/45 dB • Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz [Singapore model] ............................................... AC 230 V/50 Hz [China model] ...................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz [General model] ......................... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60Hz • Power Consumption ..................................... approx. 320 W/360 VA Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 1.5 W • Phones Output ..................................................... 150 mV/100 ohms • Dimension (W x H x D) ............................ 435 x 171 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17”) • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .............................................................. 150 mV/47 kohms PHONO ............................................................. 2.5 mV/47 kohms 6CH INPUT .............................................. 150 mV/40 – 47 kohms • Weight ......................................................................... 15 kg (33 lbs) • Accessories .............................................................. Remote Control ....................................................................................... Batteries ........................................................................ AM loop antenna ...................................................................... Indoor FM antenna ................................................................. Quick Reference Card * Specifications are subject to change without notice. VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL • Composite Video Signal Level ................................ 1 Vp-p/75 ohms ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Output Level REC OUT ........................................................ 150 mV/0.9 kohms PRE OUT ............................................................ 2.6 V/1.2 kohms SUBWOOFER .................................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kohms • AC Outlets (Total 100 W/1A maximum) ................ 2 (SWITCHED) [Australia model] .................................................. 1 (SWITCHED) ADVANCED OPERATION • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz BASS EXTENSION ................................................. +6 dB/60 Hz BASIC OPERAIONT • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less PREPARATION • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 ohms .................................................. 125/160/195/230 W [U.S.A. model] 135/170/205/245 W INTRODUCTION AUDIO SECTION • S-Video Signal Level Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms C .................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 ohms APPENDIX • Component Video Signal Level Y ........................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 ohms PB/CB, PR/CR ....................................................... 0.7 Vp-p/75 ohms • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ................................................. DC to 25 MHz, –3 dB English 79 0112V1000_74-79_EN 79 8/29/0, 1:36 PM UCA RX-V1000 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100V1000(UCA)-cv1/4 1 RX-V1000 Natural Sound AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI Printed in Malaysia ID V641380 8/29/0, 4:31 PM Quick Reference Card ■ Remote Control ■ TUNER RE-NAME Programming section TRANSMIT indicator CLEAR SYSTEM STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 PHONO POWER STANDBY CD-R CD V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD VCR 2/DVR DVD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO LEARN MACRO TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN MACRO OFF SYSTEM POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MACRO ON A and B buttons STANDBY ■ CD SYSTEM POWER PHONO 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT MACRO ON/ OFF TITLE TITLE ENTER ENTER SYSTEM POWER D-TV/LD CBL/SAT MD/TAPE VCR 1 CD-R VCR 2/DVR CD DVD Input selector buttons DISPLAY SELECT POWER 6CH INPUT ENTER DISPLAY SOURCE SELECT k/n SELECT POWER MENU Preset group A REC STOP Preset group B SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH PAUSE Operation section PLAY / 10KEY DSP 10KEY/DSP 6.1/ES 6.1/ES HALL 1 HALL 2 1 2 3 4 STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 8 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX + TV INPUT – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – EFFECT ON SCREEN LEVEL SET MENU SLEEP TEST SELECT POWER SOUND Skip search – CHAPTER + SEARCH POWER PLAY MENU REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB / PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH PAUSE 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 8 MONO MOVIE 6.1/ES MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE 10KEY DSP JAZZ CLUB + Preset number 1 to 8 Preset group E Preset group D Preset group C – 2 3 4 STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 8 MONO MOVIE 6.1/ES /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 A/B/C/D/E PRESET + – – TV INPUT TV VOL + MUTE CH TV MUTE + VOLUME EFFECT – STOP Numeric buttons 1 to 9 Clear Numeric button +10 Numeric button 0 DISC +/– (disc skip) – DISC DISC DSP program group/Numeric buttons MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 CHP/INDEX *1 VOLUME EFFECT INDEX 1 ROCK CONCERT ■ MD ■ CD-R SYSTEM SYSTEM VOLUME +/– POWER STANDBY PHONO POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD PHONO – PARAMETER SLEEP TEST Preset group A/B/C/D/E PRESET +/– + VOLUME DISC PRESET +/– LEVEL ON SCREEN PAUSE DISPLAY MUTE A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV VOL Others /DTS SUR. 10 STOP CHP/INDEX JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 9 A/B/C/D/E CHURCH REC / 10KEY DSP Display window SOURCE – CHAPTER + SEARCH POWER DISPLAY SEARCH SOUND MENU (YAMAHA: Pause/Stop) 6CH INPUT TITLE SOURCE SOURCE EFFECT PARAMETER/ SET MENU 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT TITLE TITLE Cursor buttons k/n/–/+ ENTER ENTER SOURCE SOURCE Setup section DISPLAY SEARCH DISPLAY SELECT POWER POWER Rec/Pause SOUND MENU – CHAPTER + SEARCH REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB / 10KEY DSP 6.1/ES 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 8 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E PRESET + *1 TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + Skip search PLAY PAUSE STOP Numeric buttons 1 to 9 Numeric button +10 Numeric button 0 DISPLAY SELECT POWER POWER STOP 6.1/ES INDEX Numeric button 0 SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB Skip search PLAY PAUSE 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX Numeric buttons 1 to 9 Clear Numeric button +10 A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – – MENU / 10KEY DSP *1 VOLUME EFFECT DISPLAY SEARCH + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT – DISC DISC V647510 Q-Ref(V1000)-8/24 1 8/30/0, 1:26 PM Quick Reference Card ■ VCR ■ LD (A) SYSTEM ■ CBL/SAT (CBSAT) SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER STANDBY PHONO POWER STANDBY PHONO POWER STANDBY V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT TITLE 6CH INPUT TITLE TITLE SOUND ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY SEARCH DISPLAY SELECT – CHAPTER + STOP PAUSE PLAY / HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 8 MONO MOVIE 6.1/ES MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 + TV INPUT TV VOL – SOURCE SELECT MENU 11 12 0 +10 +100 + MUTE CH TV MUTE Numeric buttons 1 to 9 + REC Clear Numeric button +10 STOP PLAY DISPLAY SELECT 10KEY DSP HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 8 MONO MOVIE TV/Video input MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E PRESET + *1 – TV INPUT TV VOL – + MUTE CH TV MUTE + VOLUME EFFECT – – SOUND MENU – CHAPTER + SEARCH PHONO POWER STANDBY TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD V-AUX TUNER MD/TAPE CD-R CD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD D-TV/LD CBL/SAT VCR 1 VCR 2/DVR DVD 6CH INPUT – CHAPTER + SEARCH REC STOP PAUSE PLAY / PAUSE Return HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 6 7 ROCK CONCERT 5 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV INPUT TV VOL – Audio Skip search PLAY + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT – DISPLAY SELECT POWER POWER DISC +/– (disc skip) – CHAPTER + SEARCH REC STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 6 7 ROCK CONCERT 5 Enter TV INPUT SOUND MENU / 10KEY DSP STOP Numeric buttons 1 to 9 Clear Numeric button +10 DISPLAY 6.1/ES MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 8 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX A/B/C/D/E PRESET + TV VOL +/– – DISC TV INPUT TV VOL + MUTE CH TV MUTE – STOP PAUSE PLAY HALL 1 HALL 2 CHURCH JAZZ CLUB 1 2 3 4 ROCK CONCERT STADIUM ENTERTAINMENT TV SPORTS 5 6 7 MONO MOVIE MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 9 8 Numeric buttons 1 to 9 /DTS SUR. 10 11 12 0 +10 +100 CHP/INDEX *2 Recall Numeric button 0 A/B/C/D/E PRESET + *1 TV INPUT TV VOL + MUTE CH TV MUTE – + VOLUME EFFECT CH +/– (channel) – *1 • TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE function if you have set up the manufacturer code for your TV in the D-TV/LD or PHONO area. • Commandes TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT et TV MUTE si l’on a programmé le code fabricant du téléviseur dans la section D-TV/LD ou PHONO. • TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT- und TV MUTE-Funktion, falls Sie den Herstellercode für Ihr Fernsehgerät im Bereich D-TV/LD oder PHONO eingestellt haben. • Knapparna TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT och TV MUTE fungerar om du ställt in tillverkarkoden för din TV i D-TV/LD-området eller PHONO-området. • TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT e TV MUTE sono operativi se nell’area D-TV/LD o PHONO è stato impostato il codice del fabbricante del televisore di cui si dispone. • Funciones TV VOL +/–, TV INPUT y TV MUTE si ha ajustado el código de fabricante para su televisor en el área D-TV/LD o PHONO. • TV VOL +/– (tv-volumeniveau), TV INPUT (tv-ingangsbron) en TV MUTE (tvdempingsfunctie) als u de fabrikantcode voor uw tv hebt ingesteld in het D-TV/ LD- of PHONO-bedieningsgedeelte. • ENTER SOUND MENU 6.1/ES – SOURCE SELECT 6.1/ES CH +/– (channel) TITLE ENTER DISPLAY 10KEY DSP Enter PHONO 6CH INPUT SOURCE 10KEY DSP Numeric button 10 or 0 REC / Numeric buttons 1 to 9 SYSTEM STANDBY V-AUX Menu cursor/ ENTER POWER STOP ■ TV (TV/LD) TITLE POWER DISC POWER POWER PAUSE DISC TITLE *1 PAUSE / 6.1/ES VOLUME EFFECT – POWER REC (Press twice to start recording) SYSTEM Title/Index Numeric button 0 DISPLAY SOUND – CHAPTER + SEARCH POWER ■ DVD POWER Menu cursor/ Menu select ENTER SOURCE DISPLAY DISC MENU DISPLAY SEARCH MENU ENTER Rewind/Fast forward /DTS SUR. 10 CHP/INDEX PLAY PAUSE JAZZ CLUB A/B/C/D/E PRESET *1 CHAPTER –/+ (chapter search) PLAY REC 10KEY DSP Chapter/Time Numeric button 0 SOUND SEARCH POWER POWER STOP MENU PHONO + VOLUME EFFECT *2 Numeric buttons 1 to 9 Numeric button 10 or 0 CH +/– (channel) – DISC TV MUTE *2 • You can control your VCR if you have set up the code for VCR 1. • Permet de commander le magnétoscope si l’on a programmé le code fabricant pour VCR 1. • Sie können Ihren Videorecorder bedienen, falls Sie den Code für VCR 1 eingestellt haben. • Du kan styra din videobandspelare om du ställt in koden för VCR 1. • Se è stato impostato il codice di VCR 1 è possibile comandare il videoregistratore di cui si dispone. • Puede controlar su videorreproductor si ha ajustado el código para VCR 1. • U kunt uw videorecorder bedienen als u de fabrikantcode voor VCR 1 hebt ingesteld. • V647510 Q-Ref(V1000)-8/24 2 8/30/0, 1:26 PM